Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2015 Cadillac XTS Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-55
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-23
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-43
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-69
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Keys, Doors, and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2015 Cadillac XTS Owner Manual M
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-4
Special Application
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar Additional
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Recommended Fluids,
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on the vehicle
because of optional equipment that
was not purchased on the vehicle,
model variants, country
specifications, features/applications
that may not be available in your
region, or changes subsequent to
the printing of this owner manual.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language manual can be
obtained from your dealer, at
www.helminc.com, or from:
The names, logos, emblems,
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
savant:
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Emblem, and XTS
are trademarks and/or service
Refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm the
features.
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
marks of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Cadillac Motor Car Division
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
wherever it appears in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 22940213 B Second Printing
© 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
Danger
{
G : Air Conditioning
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result
in serious injury or death.
Refrigerant Oil
Symbols
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar® (if equipped)
$ : Brake System Warning Light
I : Certified Technician
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
H : Flammable
Warning
{
Warning indicates a hazard that
could result in injury or death.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Caution
{
Caution indicates a hazard that
could result in property or vehicle
damage.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
( : Heated Steering Wheel
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
O : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-1
In Brief
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Steering Wheel
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Automatic Parking
Assist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Active Emergency Braking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Universal Remote System . . . 1-19
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Heated and Ventilated
Vehicle Features
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-15
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Driver Information
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . 1-17
Side Blind Zone
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Head Restraint
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Passenger Sensing
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-8.
6. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6-5.
9. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4-1.
2. Electric Parking Brake on
page 9-27.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-56.
10. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10-4.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6-6.
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA). See
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-56.
11. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5-18.
Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 5-32 (If Equipped).
Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
12. Cruise Control on page 9-32.
3. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1.
Adaptive Cruise Control on
7. Infotainment on page 7-1.
page 9-35 (If Equipped).
Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on
page 6-6.
8. Glove Box Button. See Glove
Box on page 4-2.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9-50 (If
Equipped).
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9.
Parking Assist Button. See
Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-44.
Phone Button. See Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5-2.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Display. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5-29.
Automatic Park Assist (APA)
Button. See Assistance Systems
for Parking or Backing on
page 9-44.
Heated Steering Wheel on
page 5-2 (If Equipped).
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5-3.
13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5-2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
In Brief
14. Horn on page 5-3.
7 : Press and release one time to
initiate vehicle locator. Press and
hold for three seconds to sound the
panic alarm. Press again or start the
vehicle to cancel the panic alarm.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
15. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5-2.
16. ENGINE START/STOP Button.
See Ignition Positions on
page 9-15.
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
X : Press twice quickly to release
the trunk.
17. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9-23.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
18. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4-1 (If Equipped).
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The RKE transmitter may be used
to lock and unlock the doors from up
to 60 m (197 ft) away from the
vehicle.
19. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8-1.
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3-11 (If
Equipped).
Q : Press to lock all doors.
K : Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors, depending on the
vehicle personalization settings.
See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Press the key release button near
the bottom of the transmitter to
remove the key. The key can be
used for the driver door.
See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-5
Canceling a Remote Start
Power Door Locks
Remote Vehicle Start
To cancel a remote start, do any of
the following:
If equipped with remote start, the
engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
.
Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
Starting the Vehicle
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
1. Press and release Q on the
RKE transmitter.
.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
2. Immediately press and hold /
for at least four seconds or until
the turn signal lamps flash.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-9.
3. Press the brake pedal and select
the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode to drive the vehicle.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock a door manually:
.
.
From the inside, press Q or K.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2-13.
.
Use the key in the driver door.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
The key cylinder is covered by a
cap. See Door Locks on
page 2-11.
From the outside, press Q or K
on the RKE transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-2.
.
From the inside, to lock a door
push down on the door lock
knob on top of the door. To
unlock a door, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and
again to open it.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. After 30 seconds,
repeat the steps if a 10-minute
extension is desired. Remote start
can be extended only once.
From the outside, if the vehicle is
equipped with Keyless Access,
press the button on the door handle
when the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is within range to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
In Brief
unlock it. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-2.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-2 and
Trunk on page 2-15.
The power window switches on the
driver door control all the windows.
Each passenger door has a switch
that controls only that window.
Trunk
Windows
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
See Power Windows on page 2-23.
The power windows only operate
with the ignition in ACC/
To open the trunk, press | from
inside the vehicle or press X twice
quickly on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, or press
the touch pad on the rear of the
trunk above the license plate
after unlocking all doors.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-7
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-6.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3-7.
Seat Adjustment
Power Seats
Lumbar Adjustment
Reclining Seatbacks
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
Base
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
To adjust the seat:
To adjust the lumbar support:
To adjust the seatback:
.
Move the seat forward or
.
.
Press and hold the control
Tilt the top of the control
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
forward to increase or rearward
to decrease lumbar support.
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
.
Raise or lower the front part of
.
Press and hold the control
to raise.
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
upward to raise or downward to
lower the height of the lumbar
support.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3-7.
.
Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
In Brief
If equipped, the ignition must be on
to use all uplevel seat features.
Uplevel Seat Adjustment
Uplevel Seat Control
Massage
.
Move Feature Select (1) to
display seat adjustments on the
center stack. Press and release
or hold to scroll through
features.
.
Press Up (2) to make upward
adjustments of the selected
feature.
.
Press Rearward (3) to make
rearward adjustments of the
selected feature.
Driver Seat Shown, Passenger
Seat Similar
.
Press Down (4) to make
downward adjustments of the
selected feature.
1. Feature Select
2. Up
3. Rearward
4. Down
1. Feature Select
2. Next Higher Massage Type
3. Decrease Massage Intensity
4. Next Lower Massage Type
5. Increase Massage Intensity
6. Massage On/Off
.
Press Forward (5) to make
forward adjustments of the
selected feature.
5. Forward
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-4.
If equipped, the ignition must be on
to display massage controls (1
through 5).
See Massage on page 3-12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-9
settings for the driver and
passenger seats. The driver
memory buttons also store outside
mirror and power tilt and telescoping
steering column positions, and
massage settings (if equipped).
Memory Features
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
See Memory Seats on page 3-8 and
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Second Row Seats
On some vehicles, either side of the
seatback can be folded for more
cargo space.
Driver Buttons Shown, Passenger
Buttons Similar
See Rear Seats on page 3-13.
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the center stack.
To operate, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN/START.
If equipped, the SET, "1," "2," and
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
and front passenger door are used
to manually save and recall memory
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
Press C or { to ventilate the driver
or passenger seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
In Brief
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-46.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The indicator lights
next to the buttons indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
lowest. If the front heated seats are
on high, the level may automatically
be lowered after approximately
30 minutes.
See Head Restraints on page 3-2
and Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-6.
Passenger Sensing
System
Safety Belts
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3-11.
United States
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly:
Canada
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
.
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. No
other airbag is affected by the
Safety Belts on page 3-16.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3-17.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-18.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-11
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-31.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
3. Move the selector switch to ) to
The passenger airbag status
indicator lights on the overhead
console when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-17.
deselect the mirror.
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors or, if equipped, power folding
mirrors. See Folding Mirrors on
page 2-21.
Mirror Adjustment
Interior Mirror
Adjustment
Exterior Mirror
Hold the rearview mirror in the
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle.
Press the control to move the tilt
and telescoping steering wheel up
and down or forward and rearward.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The mirror
will automatically reduce the glare
from the headlamps from behind.
The dimming feature comes on
when the vehicle is started. See
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
on page 2-22.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1. Move the selector switch to L
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
In Brief
Reading Lamps
Interior Lighting
There are reading lamps on the
overhead console and over the rear
passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened. To manually turn
the reading lamps on or off:
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp is in the overhead
console.
Press the button near the rear
passenger reading lamps.
For more information on interior
lighting, see Instrument Panel
Illumination Control on page 6-6.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press:
Press m or n next to each
overhead console reading lamp.
OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
ON: Turns the dome lamp on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-13
Exterior Lighting
5 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and
instrument panel lights.
See:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1
.
INT: Move the windshield wiper
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 6-6
lever to INT. Turn the x INT band
up for more frequent wipes
or down for less frequent wipes.
If equipped with Rainsense,
.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6-3
The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal lever.
turn the x INT band to adjust the
sensitivity. To turn the Rainsense
feature on or off, see “Rain Sense
Wipers” under Vehicle
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Turn the control to the following
positions:
O : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released. Turn to
O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
Personalization on page 5-47.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
1X : For a single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. For several wipes,
hold the lever down.
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
move the lever to select the wiper
speed.
n L : Pull the lever toward you to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the
headlamps.
HI: Use for fast wipes.
LO: Use for slow wipes.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5-3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
In Brief
Climate Controls
The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust the
heating, cooling, and ventilation.
Climate Touch Screen Controls
1. Outside Temperature Display
2. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
Climate Control Buttons
3. Fan Control
1. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
6. Defrost
4. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature)
2. Fan Control
3. OFF (Fan)
5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)
7. Rear Window Defogger
8. Recirculation
6. Climate Control Selection
(Application Tray Button)
4. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats
7. Rear (Rear Climate Control
Touch Screen)
8. Air Delivery Mode Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-15
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8-1 and Rear
Climate Control System on page 8-6
(if equipped).
shift lever must be in M (Manual
Mode). If equipped, the controls are
on the back of the steering wheel.
Tap the left control to downshift, and
the right control to upshift. A Driver
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in.
See Manual Mode on page 9-25.
Vehicle Features
Infotainment System
See the infotainment manual for
information on the radio, audio
players, phone, navigation system,
and voice or speech recognition.
It also includes information on
settings.
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Tap Shift
Steering Wheel Controls
The infotainment system can be
operated by using the steering
wheel controls. See "Steering
Wheel Controls" in the infotainment
manual.
Tap Shift allows the driver to
manually control the automatic
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
In Brief
increase speed to the next 5 km/h
(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,
press +RES up to the second
detent.
Cruise Control
SET−: Press the control down
briefly to set the speed and activate
cruise control. If the cruise control is
already active, use to decrease
vehicle speed. To decrease speed
by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET−
down to the first detent. To decrease
speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph)
mark on the speedometer, press
SET− down to the second detent.
y or z : Move SEL up or down to
go to the previous or next selection.
* : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
J : Press to turn the system on
and off. A white indicator appears in
the instrument cluster when
turned on.
S or T : Press to move between
the interactive display zones in the
cluster. Press S to go back to the
See Cruise Control on page 9-32 or
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9-35 (if equipped).
previous menu.
+RES: If there is a set speed in
memory, press the control up briefly
to resume to that speed or press
and hold to accelerate. If the cruise
control is already active, use to
increase vehicle speed. To increase
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press
+RES up to the first detent. To
SEL: Press to open a menu or
select a menu item. Press and hold
to reset values on certain screens.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is in the instrument
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5-29.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
Side Blind Zone
1-17
change to amber and flash. In
addition, beeps will sound or the
driver seat will pulse.
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System
Alert (SBZA)
If equipped, FCA may help avoid or
reduce the harm caused by
front-end crashes. FCA provides a
If equipped, SBZA will detect
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-56.
vehicles in the next lane over in the
vehicle's side blind zone area.
When this happens, the SBZA
display will light up in the
corresponding outside side mirror
and will flash if the turn signal is on.
green indicator, V, when a vehicle
is detected ahead. This indicator
displays amber if you follow a
vehicle much too closely. When
approaching a vehicle ahead too
quickly, FCA provides a flashing red
alert on the windshield and rapidly
beeps or pulses the driver seat.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid
crashes due to unintentional lane
departures. It may assist by gently
turning the steering wheel if the
vehicle approaches a detected lane
marking without using a turn signal
in that direction. It may also provide
a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
alert as the lane marking is crossed.
The system will not assist or alert if
it detects that you are actively
steering. Override LKA by turning
the steering wheel. LKA uses a
camera to detect lane markings
between 60 km/h (37 mph) and
180 km/h (112 mph).
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 9-54.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
If equipped, RVC displays a view of
the area behind the vehicle on the
center stack display when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) to
aid with parking and low-speed
backing maneuvers.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9-50.
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
unintentional lane departures at
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or
greater. LDW uses a camera sensor
to detect the lane markings. The
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-44.
See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) on
page 9-57.
LDW light, @, is green if a lane
marking is detected. If the vehicle
departs the lane, the light will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
In Brief
The vehicle may also have the Front
Parking Assist system.
which is designed to help avoid or
reduce the harm caused by backing
crashes when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse). If the system
detects the vehicle is backing too
fast to avoid a crash with a detected
object behind your vehicle in your
path, it may automatically brake
hard to a stop.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) System
If equipped, the RCTA system uses
a triangle with an arrow displayed
on the RVC screen to warn of traffic
behind your vehicle that may cross
your vehicle's path while in
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-44.
Automatic Parking
Assist (APA)
If equipped, the APA system helps
to search for and maneuver the
vehicle into parallel or perpendicular
parking spots using automatic
R (Reverse). In addition, beeps will
sound, or the driver seat will pulse.
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-44.
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-44.
steering, DIC displays, and beeps.
When the vehicle speed is below
30 km/h (18 mph), press the APA
Active Emergency
Braking System
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) it also has the Active
Emergency Braking System, which
includes Intelligent Brake
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic
Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
These systems can provide a boost
to braking or automatically brake the
vehicle to help avoid or lessen the
severity of crashes when driving in a
forward gear.
Parking Assist
If equipped, Rear Parking
button, O, to enable the system.
Assist (RPA) uses sensors on the
rear bumper to assist with parking
and avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
less than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may
display a warning triangle on the
Rear Vision Camera screen and a
graphic on the instrument cluster to
provide the object distance. In
addition, multiple beeps or seat
pulses may occur if very close to an
object.
See “Automatic Parking Assist
(APA)” under Assistance Systems
for Parking or Backing on
page 9-44.
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) System
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) it also has the Rear
Automatic Braking (RAB) system,
See Active Emergency Braking
System on page 9-52.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-19
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Remote
system.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Universal Remote System
The vehicle has three accessory
power outlets:
.
Inside the front storage area
See Universal Remote System on
page 5-55.
below the climate control
system.
.
Inside the center console.
Sunroof
For vehicles equipped with a
.
On the rear of the center
console.
sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
operate the sunroof and power
sunshade. See Ignition Positions on
page 9-15 and Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-19.
Lift the cover to access the
accessory power outlet.
If equipped, this system provides a
way to replace up to three remote
control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
See Power Outlets on page 5-6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
In Brief
the comfort open position. Press the
Performance and
Maintenance
rear of ~ again to open the
sunroof fully. If the sunshade is not
fully open when the comfort feature
is pressed the second time, the
sunshade will open fully.
Traction Control/
Electronic Stability
Control
The Traction Control System (TCS)
limits wheel spin. The system turns
on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
Express Close: Press and release
the front of ~ to express close the
sunroof.
Sunshade Switch
Open/Close: Press and hold the
1. ~ Sunroof Switch
2. Q Sunshade Switch
The StabiliTrak system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions. The
system also turns on automatically
every time the vehicle is started.
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired
position.
Sunroof Switch
Express Open/Express Close:
Press and release the rear or front
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
.
To turn off traction control, press
front of ~ to vent the sunroof. The
sunshade will automatically open
approximately 38 cm (15 in). Press
of Q to express open or express
close the sunshade. If the sunroof is
opened, the sunshade will express
close within a few inches of the
opened sunroof.
and release the g button on the
center stack. i comes on in the
instrument cluster and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5-43.
and hold the rear of ~ to close
the vent.
Comfort Stop Feature: This
feature stops the sunroof from
opening fully. Press and release the
See Sunroof on page 2-26.
rear of ~ to open the sunroof to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-21
.
To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
tires. If the warning light comes on,
stop as soon as possible and inflate
the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
the g button on the center stack,
until i and g come on in the
instrument cluster and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5-43.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Using the DIC controls on the
right side of the steering wheel,
display REMAINING OIL LIFE
on the DIC. See Driver
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
may be an early indicator that the
tire pressures are getting low and
the tires need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
.
Press and release the g button
again to turn on both systems.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-29. When remaining oil
life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
will appear on the display. See
Engine Oil Messages on
page 5-39.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
the correct tire pressures.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
2. Press SEL on the DIC controls
and hold SEL down for a few
seconds to clear the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
and reset the oil life at 100%.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10-47.
Be careful not to reset the oil life
display accidentally at any time
other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message when it is time
The low tire pressure warning light
alerts to a significant loss in
pressure of one of the vehicle's
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
In Brief
.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
Roadside Service
U.S.: 1-800-224-1400
Canada: 1-800-882-1112
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
1. Turn the ignition on with the
engine off.
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
1-888-889-2438
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
New vehicles are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Service
program.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
.
.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
See Roadside Service on
page 13-5.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10-11.
OnStar®
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
This vehicle may be equipped with a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
services may require a paid
subscription. See OnStar Overview
on page 14-1.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-1
Exterior Mirrors
Keys and Locks
Keys, Doors, and
Windows
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Keys
Warning
{
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-13
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior Mirrors
Leaving children in a vehicle with
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous and
children or others could be
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-22
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
seriously injured or killed. They
could operate the power windows
or other controls or make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the RKE transmitter
in the vehicle, and children or
others could be caught in the path
of a closing window. Do not leave
children in a vehicle with an RKE
transmitter.
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-25
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Doors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-17
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors, and Windows
driver door and for locking the rear
seatbacks so they cannot be folded.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
See Rear Seats on page 3-13.
.
Check the distance. The
To remove the key, press the button
near the bottom of the transmitter,
and pull the key out. Never pull the
key out without pressing the button.
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
If it becomes difficult to turn the key,
inspect the key blade for debris.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
.
Contact Roadside Service if locked
out of the vehicle. See Roadside
Service on page 13-5.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14-1.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Keyless Access system allows
for vehicle entry when the
transmitter is within range. See
“Keyless Access Operation”
following.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
There is a key inside the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter that
is used for locking/unlocking the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-3
The RKE transmitter functions may
work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from
the vehicle.
headlamps and back-up lamps will
come on for about 30 seconds to
light your approach to the vehicle.
The turn signal indicators may flash
to indicate unlocking. See “Remote
Lock, Unlock, Start” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock and the
driver door will immediately unlock if
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out is
enabled. See “Unlocked Door Anti
Lock Out” under Vehicle
Other conditions, such as those
previously stated, can impact the
performance of the transmitter.
Personalization on page 5-47. If the
Memory seat positions may be
recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
See Memory Seats on page 3-8 and
“Remote Lock, Unlock, Start” under
Vehicle Personalization on
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock.
Pressing Q may also arm the alarm
system. See Vehicle Alarm System
on page 2-17.
page 5-47.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
Pressing K will disarm the alarm
system. See Vehicle Alarm System
on page 2-17.
pressing and holding Q for
one second will fold the mirrors. The
auto mirror folding feature will not
operate unless it is enabled. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding K for
one second will unfold the mirrors.
The auto mirror folding feature will
not operate unless it is enabled.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound on the
second press to indicate locking.
See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors depending
on the personalization settings. See
“Remote Lock, Unlock, Start” under
Vehicle Personalization on
On some models, pressing and
page 5-47. When remotely
unlocking the vehicle at night, the
holding K will open all of the
windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keyless Access Operation
/ (Remote Start): If equipped,
press and release Q and then
immediately press and hold / for at
least four seconds to start the
engine from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-9.
The Keyless Access system allows
the doors and trunk to be locked
and unlocked without pressing the
RKE transmitter button. The RKE
transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)
of the door being opened. If the
vehicle has this feature, there will be
a button on the outside front door
handles.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
initiate vehicle locator. The exterior
lamps flash and the horn chirps
Keyless Access can be
programmed to unlock all doors on
the first lock/unlock press from the
driver door. See Vehicle
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Similar
three times. Press and hold 7 for
three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signal lamps flash for
Pressing the lock/unlock button will
cause all doors to lock if any of the
following occur:
Personalization on page 5-47.
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
the Driver Door
30 seconds, or until 7 is pressed
again or the vehicle is started.
.
It has been more than
When the doors are locked and the
RKE transmitter is within range of
the door handle, pressing the lock/
unlock button on the driver door
handle will unlock the driver door.
If the lock/unlock button is pressed
again within five seconds, all
X (Remote Trunk Release):
Press twice quickly to release the
trunk.
five seconds since the first lock/
unlock button press.
.
Two lock/unlock button presses
were used to unlock all doors.
.
Any vehicle door has been
opened and all doors are now
closed.
passenger doors will unlock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-5
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
the Passenger Doors
If passive locking is enabled, the
doors may lock with the RKE
transmitter inside the vehicle. Do
not leave the RKE transmitter in an
unattended vehicle.
Keyed Access
To access a vehicle with a dead
transmitter battery, see Door Locks
on page 2-11.
When the doors are locked and the
RKE transmitter is within range of
the door handle, pressing the lock/
unlock button on a passenger door
handle will unlock all doors.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Temporary Disable Passive
Locking Feature
Pressing the lock/unlock button will
cause all doors to lock if any of the
following occur:
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
Temporarily disable the passive
locking by pressing and holding K
on the interior door switch with a
door open for at least four seconds,
or until three chimes are heard.
Passive locking will then remain
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters no
longer work. Each vehicle can have
up to eight transmitters matched
to it.
.
The lock/unlock button was used
to unlock all doors.
.
Any vehicle door has been
opened and all doors are now
closed.
disabled until Q on the interior door
is pressed, or until the vehicle is
turned on.
Passive Locking
To customize the doors to
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
This feature will lock the vehicle
several seconds after all doors are
closed, if the vehicle is off and at
least one RKE transmitter has been
removed or none remain in the
interior.
automatically lock when exiting the
vehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,
Start” under Vehicle Personalization
on page 5-47.
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
Keyless Trunk Opening
To program, the vehicle must be off
and all transmitters, both currently
recognized and new, must be
with you.
If other electronic devices interfere
with the RKE transmitter signal, the
vehicle may not detect the RKE
transmitter inside the vehicle.
Press the touch pad on the rear of
the trunk above the license plate to
open the trunk when the RKE
transmitter is in range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors, and Windows
1. Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray.
3. Remove the key lock cylinder
cap. See Door Locks on
4. Replace the recognized
transmitter with a new
transmitter. Place the new
transmitter in the transmitter
pocket.
page 2-11. Insert the vehicle key
into the key lock cylinder on the
driver door handle. Then turn the
key counterclockwise, to the
unlock position, five times within
10 seconds.
5. Press the ENGINE START/
STOP button. When the
transmitter is learned, the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays READY FOR
REMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.
6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press K
or Q on the transmitter.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.
2. Place the recognized
transmitter(s) in the pocket. The
transmitter pocket is inside the
center console storage area
between the driver and front
passenger seats.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ENGINE START/STOP
button for approximately
12 seconds to exit
programming mode.
7. Return the key back into the
transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-7
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter
2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC
displays PRESS ENGINE
START BUTTON TO LEARN,
then press the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
If there are no currently recognized
transmitters available, follow this
procedure to program up to eight
transmitters. This feature is not
available in Canada. This procedure
will take approximately 30 minutes
to complete. The vehicle must be off
and all transmitters to be
The DIC display will again show
REMOTE LEARN PENDING,
PLEASE WAIT.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
times. After the third time all
previously known transmitters
will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters
can be relearned during the next
steps.
programmed must be with you.
1. Remove the key lock cylinder
cap. See Door Locks on
4. Place the new transmitter in the
transmitter pocket. The
page 2-11. Insert the vehicle key
into the key lock cylinder on the
driver door handle; then turn the
key counterclockwise, to the
unlock position five times within
10 seconds.
transmitter pocket is inside the
center console storage area
between the driver and front
passenger seats. The storage
area will need to be opened to
access the transmitter pocket.
The DIC display should
now show READY FOR
REMOTE # 1.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
5. Press the ENGINE START/
STOP button. When the
transmitter is learned, the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors, and Windows
6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press K
or Q on the transmitter.
To start the vehicle:
Battery Replacement
1. Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray.
Caution
{
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.
When replacing the battery, do
not touch any of the circuitry on
the transmitter. Static from your
body could damage the
transmitter.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ENGINE START/STOP
button for approximately
12 seconds to exit
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
programming mode.
7. Return the key back into the
transmitter.
message displays in the DIC.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
2. Place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket.
If the transmitter battery is weak,
or if there is interference with the
signal, the DIC may display NO
REMOTE DETECTED or NO
REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED
PLACE KEY IN TRANSMITTER
POCKET THEN START YOUR
VEHICLE when you try to start the
vehicle. See Key and Lock
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
Messages on page 5-39.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-9
1. Press the button on the side of
the transmitter near the bottom
and pull the key out.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This
button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
If equipped, heated and ventilated
front seats may also come on if
enabled in vehicle personalization.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3-11 and Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47
The climate control system will use
the previous settings during a
remote start. The rear window
defogger may come on during
remote start based on cold ambient
conditions. The rear defog indicator
light does not come on during
remote start.
3. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
4. Insert the new battery on the
back housing, positive side
facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
2. Separate the two halves of the
transmitter using a flat tool
inserted into the bottom center
of the transmitter. Do not use the
key slot.
5. Align the front and back housing
then snap the transmitter
together.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows the engine to be
started from outside the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors, and Windows
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not
use the remote start feature. The
vehicle may run out of fuel.
During the remote start, the
doors will be locked and the
parking lamps will remain on as
long as the engine is running.
The vehicle's ignition must be
changed to ON/RUN/START and
then back to OFF before the remote
start procedure can be used again.
The RKE transmitter range may be
less while the vehicle is running.
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the ignition
is put in ON/RUN/START.
Canceling a Remote Start
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 2-2.
To cancel a remote start, do any of
the following:
.
Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
3. Press the brake pedal and select
the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode to drive the vehicle.
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Extending Engine Run Time
1. Press and release Q on the
.
Turn the vehicle on and then
The engine run time can also be
extended by another 10 minutes,
if during the first 10 minutes
Steps 1–2 are repeated while the
engine is still running. An extension
can be requested, 30 seconds after
starting. This provides a total of
20 minutes.
RKE transmitter.
back off.
2. Immediately press and hold /
for at least four seconds or
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
until the turn signal lamps flash.
This confirms the request to
remote start the vehicle has
been received. If the vehicle's
lamps are not visible, press and
The remote start will not operate if
any of the following occur:
.
The ignition is in any mode other
than OFF.
The remote start can only be
extended once.
hold / for at least four seconds.
.
The transmitter is in the vehicle.
.
A maximum of two remote starts,
or a remote start with an extension,
are allowed between ignition cycles.
The hood is not closed.
.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-11
.
.
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
Inside the Vehicle
Warning (Continued)
On the rear doors, push down on
the door lock knob to lock the door
manually. Pull once on the door
handle to unlock the door and again
to open the door.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.
.
The oil pressure is low.
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Two remote vehicle starts or a
start with an extension have
already been used.
Press the power door lock switch to
lock or unlock all doors
automatically. See Power Door
Locks on page 2-13.
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Outside the Vehicle
Door Locks
Use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, the key cylinder
on the driver front door, or the key
cylinder on the passenger front
door, if equipped. The key cylinder
is covered with a cap.
Warning
{
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when slowing or stopping the
vehicle. Lock the doors to
help prevent this from
happening.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keyless Access
Key Cylinder Access
To access the key cylinder:
1. Pull the door handle (1) to the
open position.
To replace the cap:
1. Pull the door handle to the open
position.
If equipped, use the Keyless Access
system to lock and unlock the door.
When the doors are locked and the
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)
of the driver door handle, press the
lock/unlock button. When unlocking
from the driver door, the first press
unlocks that door; press again
within five seconds to unlock all
passenger doors. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3)
on the bottom of the cap (2) and
pry outward.
2. Insert the two tabs (7) at the
back of the cap (8) between the
seal (5) and the metal base (6).
3. Move the cap (2) rearward and
remove.
4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.
Operation on page 2-2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-13
Power Door Locks
When Q is pressed on the power
door lock switch, while the door is
open, a chime will sound three
times indicating that delayed locking
is active.
When all the doors are closed, the
doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed,
the five-second timer will reset once
all the doors are closed again.
Press Q on the door lock switch
again or press Q on the RKE
transmitter to override this feature
and lock the doors immediately.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
This feature can also be
programmed. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the actual
locking of the doors.
Automatic Door Locks
The vehicle is programmed so that
when the doors are closed, the
ignition is on, and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park), the doors
will lock.
3. Move the cap forward and press
to snap the cap in place.
4. Release the door handle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors, and Windows
To unlock the doors:
doors will lock and only the driver
door will unlock after closing all of
the doors.
Safety Locks
The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from inside the vehicle.
.
Press an unlock switch on
a door.
This feature can be manually
overridden with the driver door open
.
Shift the transmission into
P (Park).
by pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
The power door locks can be
programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When this feature is on and door
locking is requested with the driver
door open, all doors will lock and
only the driver door will unlock. The
driver door must be closed before
locking is requested for all doors to
remain locked. When this feature is
off, the Delayed Door Lock menu
will be available.
Lockout Protection
If the vehicle is in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START
with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter in the
vehicle and the power door lock
switch is pressed with the driver
door open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver door will unlock.
Press v { to activate the safety
locks on the rear doors. The
indicator light in the switch will
illuminate when activated.
This feature can also be
programmed. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
If the vehicle is off with the RKE
transmitter in the vehicle and the
power door lock switch is pressed
with the driver door open, all the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Warning (Continued)
2-15
The rear door power windows are
also disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2-23.
Doors
.
Adjust the climate control
Trunk
system to a setting that
Press v { again to deactivate the
safety locks.
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See “Climate
Control Systems” in the
Index.
Warning
{
If the rear inside door handle is
being pulled when the safety lock is
deactivated, that door will remain
locked and the indicator light may
flash. Release the handle, then
press the safety lock twice to
deactivate the safety locks.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
or with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust on
page 9-22.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Trunk Lock Release
Use the handle to assist in closing
the trunk. Do not use the handle as
a tie-down.
.
Press the touch pad on the trunk
above the license plate.
If the vehicle is ever without power,
the trunk area can still be accessed
by folding the rear seat:
To open the trunk:
With the Keyless Access system the
RKE transmitter must be within 1 m
(3 ft) of the trunk for it to be
recognized. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-2.
.
1. Fold down the rear seatback.
Press | from inside the
See Rear Seats on page 3-13.
vehicle.
2. Reach inward through the
opening to locate the emergency
trunk release handle.
.
Press X twice quickly on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
3. Pull the release handle to open
the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-17
There is a glow-in-the-dark
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
the vehicle impossible to steal.
emergency trunk release handle on
the trunk lid. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle to open the trunk
from the inside.
Vehicle Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
After use, return to the stored
position.
Caution
{
Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or
anchor point when securing items
in the trunk as it could damage
the handle.
The indicator light, on the
instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status of
the system.
Off: Alarm system is disarmed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Keys, Doors, and Windows
On Solid: Vehicle is secured
during the delay to arm the system.
will bypass the 30-second delay
and immediately arm the alarm
system.
Disarming the Alarm System
To disarm the alarm system or turn
off the alarm if it has been activated:
Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.
A door, the hood, or the trunk
is open.
The vehicle alarm system will not
arm if the doors are locked with
the key.
.
Press K on the RKE transmitter.
.
Unlock the vehicle using the
Slow Flash: Alarm system is
armed.
Keyless Access system.
If the driver door is opened without
first unlocking with the RKE
transmitter, the horn will chirp and
the lights will flash to indicate
pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not
started, or the door is not unlocked
.
Start the vehicle.
Arming the Alarm System
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
1. Close the trunk and the hood.
Turn off the vehicle.
.
Lock the vehicle after all
2. Lock the vehicle in one of
three ways:
occupants have left the vehicle
and all doors are closed.
by pressing K on the RKE
transmitter during the 10–second
pre-alarm, the alarm will be
activated.
.
Use the RKE transmitter.
.
Always unlock a door with the
RKE transmitter or use the
Keyless Access system.
.
Use the Keyless Access
system.
The alarm will also be activated if a
passenger door, the trunk, or the
hood is opened without first
disarming the system. When the
alarm is activated, the turn signals
flash and the horn sounds for about
30 seconds. The alarm system will
then re-arm to monitor for the next
unauthorized event.
.
With a door open, press the
Unlocking the driver door with the
key will not disarm the system or
turn off the alarm.
inside Q.
3. After 30 seconds the alarm
system will arm, and the
indicator light will begin to slowly
flash indicating the alarm system
is operating. Pressing Q on the
RKE transmitter a second time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-19
The immobilization system is
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light may come on briefly
when the ignition is turned on.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
disarmed when the pushbutton start
is activated to enter the ACC/
ACCESSORY mode or the ON/
RUN/START mode and a valid
transmitter is present in the vehicle.
If K is pressed and the horn chirps
and the lights flash three times, the
alarm was activated while the alarm
system was armed.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the alarm system has been
activated, a message will appear on
the DIC. See Security Messages on
page 5-44.
If the vehicle will not change ignition
modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/
RUN/START, OFF), and the RKE
transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another transmitter.
Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket
in the center console. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 5-39.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
The security light in the instrument
cluster comes on if there is a
problem with arming or disarming
the theft-deterrent system.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
If the ignition modes will not change
with the other transmitter, your
vehicle needs service. If the ignition
does change modes, the first
transmitter may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new RKE transmitter programmed to
the vehicle.
The system has one or more RKE
transmitters matched to an
immobilizer control unit in your
vehicle. Only a correctly matched
RKE transmitter will start the
vehicle. If the transmitter is ever
damaged, you may not be able to
start your vehicle.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the vehicle is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Keys, Doors, and Windows
It is possible for the immobilizer
system to learn new or replacement
RKE transmitters. Up to eight
transmitters can be programmed for
the vehicle. To program additional
transmitters, see “Programming
Transmitters to the Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Power Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
Caution
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
System Operation on page 2-2.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
1. Move the selector switch to L
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
3. Move the selector switch to ) to
deselect the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-21
Exterior Automatic Dimming
Mirror
2. Press the down arrow to fold the
mirrors.
Folding Mirrors
Manual Folding Mirrors
The vehicle may have a driver
exterior automatic dimming mirror
that will automatically adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind.
3. Press the down arrow again to
unfold the mirrors.
The mirrors can be folded inward
toward the vehicle to prevent
damage when going through an
automatic car wash. Push the mirror
outward to return it to the original
position.
Heated Mirrors
Memory Mirrors
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
The vehicle may have memory
mirrors. See Memory Seats on
page 3-8.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8-1.
Power Folding Mirrors
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Reverse Tilt Mirrors
The vehicle may have SBZA. See
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9-54.
If equipped with memory seats, the
passenger and/or driver mirror tilts
to a preselected position when the
vehicle is in R (Reverse). This
allows the curb to be seen when
parallel parking.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle has a turn signal
indicator on the mirror housings.
The indicator will flash when a turn
signal or the hazard warning
flashers are used.
1. If the vehicle is equipped with
power folding mirrors, move the
selector switch to the ) position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Keys, Doors, and Windows
The mirror(s) return to the original
position when:
Interior Mirrors
Windows
.
The vehicle is shifted out of
Interior Rearview Mirrors
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
view of the area behind your
vehicle.
Warning
{
R (Reverse), or remains in
R (Reverse) for about
30 seconds.
Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
.
The ignition is turned off.
If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle
may have three control buttons at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.
.
The vehicle is driven in
R (Reverse) above a set speed.
To turn this feature on or off, see
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The mirror
will automatically reduce the glare
from the headlamps from behind.
The dimming feature comes on
when the vehicle is started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-23
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof, if equipped.
Express-Down/Up Windows
Windows with the express feature
allow the windows to be raised and
lowered all the way without holding
the switch.
Press or pull the switch fully and
release it to activate the express
feature.
Power Windows
The express mode can be canceled
by briefly pressing or pulling the
switch.
Warning
{
The power windows only operate
with the ignition in ACC/
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout switch to prevent
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-19.
If any object is in the path of the
window when the express-up is
active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a
preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing may
also cause the window to
The power window switches on the
driver door control all the windows.
Each passenger door has a switch
that controls only that window.
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2-1.
auto-reverse. The window will return
to normal operation after the
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
obstruction or condition is removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Keys, Doors, and Windows
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Override
Programming the Power
Windows
If the vehicle battery has been
recharged or disconnected, or is not
working, the front power windows
will need to be reprogrammed for
the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Warning
{
Window Operation from
Outside the Vehicle
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse
The vehicle may be equipped with a
remote venting window feature.
automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
As you approach the vehicle,
press K on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter long enough
for the windows to start lowering to
the full open position.
To program:
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active, close all doors.
Pressing the K again will cause
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
The anti-pinch feature can be
overridden. Hold the window switch
all the way up to the second
position. The window will rise for as
long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express
mode is reactivated.
window movement to stop.
This feature may be turned off by
your dealer.
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
In this mode, the window can close
on an object in its path. Use care
when using the override mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-25
The rear door locks are also
disabled. See Safety Locks on
page 2-14.
Window Lockout
Rear Window Sunshade
Press v { again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
If the indicator light flashes, the
feature may not be working properly.
Sun Visors
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
On vehicles with a rear window
sunshade, the sunshade switch is
on the overhead console. The
sunshade only operates with the
ignition in ON/RUN/START.
Press v { to activate the window
lockout. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate when
activated.
To open the sunshade, press and
release the switch. The sunshade
will fully extend. To close the
sunshade, press and release the
switch again. The sunshade will fully
close.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Keys, Doors, and Windows
When shifting the vehicle into
R (Reverse), the sunshade will
automatically retract if it is
extended. It will re-extend after a
short delay when shifting into D
(Drive).
Roof
Sunroof
For vehicles equipped with a
sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
operate the sunroof and power
sunshade. See Ignition Positions on
page 9-15 and Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-19.
If equipped, the rear seat center
armrest may have rear window
sunshade buttons.
Rear Passenger Door Sunshades
Attach it to the hooks at the top of
the window.
To close the sunshade, use the
handle to release it from the hooks
and roll it down.
If equipped, use the handle to pull
the sunshade up.
1. ~ Sunroof Switch
2. Q Sunshade Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2-27
Sunroof Switch
Sunshade Switch
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
Open/Close: Press and hold the
front of ~ to vent the sunroof. The
sunshade will automatically open
approximately 38 cm (15 in). Press
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired
position.
and hold the rear of ~ to close
the vent.
Express Open/Express Close:
Press and release the rear or front
of Q to express open or express
close the sunshade. If the sunroof is
opened, the sunshade will express
close within a few inches of the
opened sunroof.
Comfort Stop Feature: The
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof has a comfort stop feature
that stops the sunroof from opening
fully. Press and release the rear of
~ to open the sunroof to the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
comfort open position. Pressing the
Anti-Pinch Feature
rear of ~ again will open the
sunroof fully. If the sunshade is not
fully open when the comfort stop
feature is pressed the second time,
the sunshade will open fully.
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof/sunshade when it is closing,
the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof/
sunshade from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof/
sunshade will then return to the
full-open position. To close the
sunroof/sunshade, see “Express
Open/Express Close” earlier in this
section.
Express Close: Press and release
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.
the front of ~ to express close the
sunroof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-1
Seats and
Restraints
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37
Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Front Seats
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-44
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Replacing LATCH System
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-6
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-7
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated and Ventilated Front
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-26
When Should an Airbag
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Passenger Sensing
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Rear Seat
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-55
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Warning
{
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted.
If your vehicle has rear head
restraints that fold down, always
return them to the full upright
position whenever an occupant is
seated in the seat.
To raise or lower the head restraint,
press the button located on the side
of the head restraint and pull up or
push the head restraint down, and
release the button. Pull and push on
the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-3
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Rear Seats
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To adjust the head restraint forward
or rearward, press the button
located on the side facing of the
head restraint and move the head
restraint forward or rearward until
the desired locking position is
reached. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
The head restraint can be folded
forward to allow for better visibility
when the rear seat is unoccupied.
To fold the head restraint, press the
button on the side of the head
restraint.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not removable.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
When an occupant or child restraint
is in the seat, always return the
head restraint to the full upright
position. Pull the head restraint up
and push it rearward until it locks
into place. Push and pull on the
head restraint to make sure that it is
locked.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
Uplevel Seat Adjustment
If equipped, the ignition must be on
to use all uplevel seat features.
Uplevel Seat Control
Always adjust the head restraint so
that the top of the restraint is at the
same height as the top of the
occupant's head.
The head restraint will fold forward
automatically.
Rear outboard head restraints are
not removable.
1. Feature Select
2. Up
3. Rearward
4. Down
5. Forward
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-5
.
Move Feature Select (1) to
display seat adjustments on the
center stack. Press and release
or hold to scroll through
features.
Lumbar and Bolster Support
To adjust bolster support,
if equipped:
To adjust lumbar support,
if equipped:
.
.
.
.
Press Up (2) to make upward
adjustments of the selected
feature.
Press Rearward (3) to make
rearward adjustments of the
selected feature.
Press Down (4) to make
downward adjustments of the
selected feature.
.
Press and release or hold
Press Forward (5) to make
forward adjustments of the
selected feature.
Feature Select (1) to scroll to
bolster support on the center
stack.
.
Press and release or hold
Feature Select (1) to scroll to
lumbar support on the center
stack.
.
Press Forward (5) or
Rearward (3) to adjust bolster
support inward or outward.
.
Press Forward (5) or
Rearward (3) to adjust lumbar
forward or rearward.
.
Press Up (2) or Down (4) to
adjust lumbar support up
or down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
Upper Shoulder Support
To adjust:
Power Seat Adjustment
.
To adjust upper shoulder support,
if equipped:
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Warning
{
You can lose control of the
.
.
Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-7.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-7.
.
Some vehicles are equipped with a
feature that activates a vibrating
pulse alert in the driver seat to help
avoid crashes. See Driver
Press and release or hold
Feature Select (1) to scroll to
upper shoulder support on the
center stack.
Assistance Systems on page 9-43.
.
Press Forward (5) or
Rearward (3) to adjust shoulder
support forward or rearward.
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks
3-7
Lumbar Adjustment
Thigh Support
Adjustment
Base
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
To adjust:
To adjust:
If equipped, pull up on the lever.
Then pull or push on the support to
lengthen or shorten. Release the
lever to lock in place.
.
.
Press and hold the control
forward to increase or rearward
to decrease support.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
.
Press and hold the control
upward to raise or downward to
lower the height of the support.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-4
for uplevel lumbar seat adjustment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
Memory Seats
Warning
{
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Driver Buttons Shown, Passenger
Buttons Similar
If equipped, the SET, "1," "2," and
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
and front passenger door are used
to manually save and recall memory
settings for the driver and
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
passenger seats. The driver
memory buttons also store outside
mirror, power tilt and telescoping
steering column positions, and
massage intensity (if equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-9
Storing Memory Positions
If storing a driver exit position,
also adjust the power tilt and
telescoping steering column and
the outside mirrors on some
vehicles.
If the massage feature is off when
the memory recall is performed, the
previously stored type and intensity
will be recalled, but it will remain off
until activated with the On/Off
control.
To save positions to the “1” and “2”
buttons:
1. Adjust the driver or passenger
seat to the desired position.
2. Press and release SET. A beep
will sound.
If storing a driver position, also
adjust the outside mirrors and
the power tilt and telescoping
steering column and massage
intensity (if equipped).
Automatically Recalling Memory
Positions (Auto Memory Recall)
(Driver Only)
3. Immediately press and hold B
until two beeps sound.
The Auto (Automatic) Memory
Recall feature automatically recalls
the current driver’s previously stored
“1” or “2” position when entering the
vehicle.
Manually Recalling Memory
Positions
2. Press and release SET. A beep
will sound.
If the vehicle is OFF or not in
3. Immediately press and hold “1”
P (Park), press and hold "1," "2," or
B to manually recall the previously
stored memory positions. Releasing
until two beeps sound.
Depending upon the Auto Memory
Recall feature enabled in the vehicle
personalization menu, memory “1”
or “2” positions are recalled in the
following ways:
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a
"1,” "2," or B before the stored
positions are reached stops the
recall.
second driver using “2.”
To save positions to the B (Exit)
button and easy exit features:
To activate the recall when On -
Driver Door Open is selected in the
personalization menu, do one of the
following:
If the vehicle is ON and in P (Park),
1. Adjust the driver or passenger
seat to the desired position for
getting out of the vehicle.
press and release “1,” “2,” or B to
manually recall the previously
stored memory positions. Placing
the ignition in OFF/LOCK before the
stored positions are reached stops
the recall.
.
Press K on the RKE transmitter
and open the driver door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
.
.
The vehicle is turned off with the
driver door open.
Press K on the RKE transmitter
when the driver door is
already open.
RKE transmitters are not labeled
with a number. If your memory seat
position is stored to "1" or "2" but
this position is not automatically
recalling, then change the stored
position or switch RKE transmitters
with the other driver.
Obstructions
.
Press the lock/unlock button on
the outside driver door handle
and open the driver door. The
RKE transmitter must be present
for the recall to activate.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the recall may stop.
Remove the obstruction. Then do
one of the following:
Easy Exit Recall (Driver Only)
To activate the recall when On - At
Ignition On is selected in the vehicle
personalization menu:
.
If programmed on in the vehicle
personalization menu, the easy exit
feature automatically moves the
driver seat, power tilt and
telescoping steering column, and
outside mirrors on some vehicles to
the memory positions and settings
If automatically or manually
recalling the stored memory
position, press and hold the
appropriate manual control for
two seconds. Try recalling again
by pressing the appropriate
memory button. If automatically
recalling the position, try
.
Place the ignition in ON/RUN/
START.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
saved to the B (Exit) button. See
“Storing Memory Positions” listed
previously. See also Vehicle
recalling again by opening the
To stop recall movement, press one
of the memory, power mirror,
or power seat controls; or press the
power tilt and telescoping steering
column control. If On - At Ignition
On is selected in the vehicle
personalization menu, placing the
ignition in OFF/LOCK also stops the
recall.
driver door and pressing K on
the RKE transmitter.
Personalization on page 5-47.
.
Easy exit recall automatically
activates when one of the following
occurs:
If recalling the exit position,
press and hold the appropriate
manual control for the exit
feature not recalling for
two seconds. Then try recalling
the exit position again.
.
The vehicle is turned off and the
driver door is opened within a
short time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-11
If the memory position is still not
recalling, see your dealer for
service.
cooled. When a heated seat is
turned on, the symbol turns red.
When a ventilated seat is turned on,
the symbol turns blue.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The indicator lights
next to the buttons indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
lowest. If the heated seats are on
high, the level may automatically be
lowered after approximately
Warning
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the center stack.
To operate, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN/START.
30 minutes.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
Remote Start Heated and
Ventilated Seats
During a remote start, the heated or
ventilated seats, if equipped, can be
turned on automatically. When it is
cold outside, the heated seats turn
on, and when it is hot outside the
ventilated seats turn on. The heated
or ventilated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned on.
Press C or { to ventilate the driver
or passenger seat.
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
When this feature is off, the heated
and ventilated seat symbols on the
buttons are white. A ventilated seat
has a fan that pulls or pushes air
through the seat. The air is not
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
Press the heated or ventilated seat
button to use the heated or
ventilated seats after the vehicle is
started.
Press Massage On/Off (6) to
reactivate the most recent massage
type and intensity for a
Massage
predetermined amount of time.
The heated or ventilated seat
indicator lights do not turn on during
a remote start.
Massage may also be activated and
adjusted as follows:
1. Move Feature Select (1) to
display seating adjustments on
the center stack. Press and
release or hold forward or
rearward to scroll to massage
options and activate.
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
The heated or ventilated seats may
be enabled or disabled in the
vehicle personalization menu. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-9
and Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
2. Press Next Higher Massage
Type (2) or Next Lower Massage
Type (4) to select the next higher
or lower massage type.
Driver Seat Shown, Passenger
Seat Similar
1. Feature Select
3. Press Increase Massage
Intensity (5) or Decrease
Massage Intensity (3) to
increase or decrease the
intensity of the massage.
2. Next Higher Massage Type
3. Decrease Massage Intensity
4. Next Lower Massage Type
5. Increase Massage Intensity
6. Massage On/Off
If equipped, the ignition must be on
to use the massage feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Raising the Seatback
3-13
To fold the seatback:
Rear Seats
Folding the Seatback
Warning
{
On some vehicles, either side of the
seatback can be folded for more
cargo space. Fold a seatback only
when the vehicle is not moving.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Caution
{
Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause
damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their
normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
Warning
{
1. Pull the lever on top of the
seatback to unlock it.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
A red tab near the seatback
lever raises when the seatback
is unlocked.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Repeat the steps to fold the
other seatback, if desired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
To raise a seatback:
To lock or unlock a seatback:
Rear Seat Armrest
1. Lift the seatback up and push it
rearward to lock it in place.
A red tab near the seatback
lever retracts when the seatback
is locked in place.
2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
3. Repeat the steps to raise the
other seatback, if necessary.
When the seat is not in use, it
should be kept in the upright, locked
position.
1. Insert the vehicle key into the
lock next to the seatback release
lever.
The rear seat has an armrest in the
center of the seatback. Lower the
armrest to access the cupholders.
Locking and Unlocking the
Seatback
2. Turn the key toward the front of
the vehicle to lock or unlock the
seatback.
To fold, lift the armrest up and push
it rearward until it is flush with the
seatback.
The rear seatbacks can be locked
or unlocked using the vehicle key.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
other seatback, if desired.
The armrest may also have controls
for the rear window sunshade and/
or the infotainment system. See the
infotainment manual and Rear
When the seatback is locked, the
seatback release lever will not work.
The seatbacks cannot be folded
down when the seatback lock is
engaged.
Window Sunshade on page 2-25.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-15
on the button will turn on when the
heated seat is on. On vehicles with
rear climate controls, an indicator on
the climate control display appears
when this feature is on.
Heated Rear Seats
Warning
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns.
See the Warning under Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3-11.
On vehicles without rear climate
controls, press the button again to
turn this feature off. The light on the
button will turn off. On vehicles with
rear climate controls, this feature
turns on at the highest setting. With
each press of the button, the heated
seat changes to the next lower
setting, and then the off setting.
Three lights indicate the highest
setting, and one light indicates the
lowest. If the heated seats are on
high, the level may automatically be
lowered after approximately
Rear Heated Seat Buttons with
Rear Climate Controls Shown,
Base Similar
If available, the buttons are on the
rear of the center console.
With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,
30 minutes.
press M or L to heat the left or right
outboard seat cushion and
seatback. On vehicles without rear
climate controls, an indicator light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Seats and Restraints
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
Warning (Continued)
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts.
Warning
{
Always wear a safety belt, and
check that all passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much
worse than if you are wearing
safety belts. You can be seriously
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle. In
addition, anyone who is not
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5-15.
Some vehicles have a rear seat
pass-through door in the center of
the rear seatback. Fold down the
center armrest and pull the latch to
open the door.
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
The pass-through door can be
locked or unlocked using the knob
on the back of the door. Open the
trunk to access the lock. Turn the
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
knob toward Q to lock the door or
away from Q to unlock the door.
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-17
safety belts. That is why wearing
safety belts makes such good
sense.
Also, in nearly all states and in
all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts.
Why Safety Belts Work
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older
Children on page 3-38 or Infants
and Young Children on page 3-40.
Follow those rules for everyone's
protection.
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
as fast as the vehicle does. If the
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
going until something stops you.
It could be the windshield, the
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection.
instrument panel, or the safety belts!
When you wear a safety belt, you
and the vehicle slow down together.
There is more time to stop because
you stop over a longer distance and,
when worn properly, your strongest
bones take the forces from the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
There are important things to know
about wearing a safety belt properly.
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
.
Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
Warning
{
You can be seriously injured,
or even killed, by not wearing
your safety belt properly.
.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front
of you.
.
Never allow the lap or
shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
.
Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.
.
Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.
.
Wear the lap part of the belt low
and snug on the hips, just
.
Never route the lap or
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
shoulder belt over an
armrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-19
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for use and
important safety information.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3-23.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
Adjust the guide so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3-17.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into
position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
activation are met. Safety belt
pretensioners can also help tighten
the safety belts in a side crash or a
rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and possibly other
parts of the safety belt system will
need to be replaced. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts after a
Crash on page 3-24.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Push down on the release button
and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing the slide/
trim up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-21
To install:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear safety
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer.
Rear safety belt comfort guides may
provide added safety belt comfort
for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of the
seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Store
the guide in its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
Warning (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be behind the
belt with the plastic guide on the
front.
Warning
{
4. Buckle, position, and release the
safety belt as described
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. See the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5-15.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3-23.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Safety System Check
Warning
{
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a
Crash
Airbag System
Vehicles with a standard wheelbase
and a factory installed rear seat
have the following airbags:
.
Warning
{
A frontal airbag for the driver
and for the front outboard
passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
.
A knee airbag for the driver and
for the front outboard passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the front
outboard passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-16.
.
Seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the second row
outboard passengers.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the front outboard
passenger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
3-25
Vehicles with an extended
wheelbase or without a rear seat
have the following airbags:
For seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
side of the seatback closest to
the door.
in every crash. In some crashes
safety belts are the only restraint.
See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3-28.
.
A frontal airbag for the driver
and for the front outboard
passenger.
For roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
.
A knee airbag for the driver and
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce the chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or
being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
for the front outboard passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the front
outboard passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and front outboard passenger.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
All vehicle airbags have the word
AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
near the deployment opening.
Warning
{
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the center of the
steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front
outboard passenger.
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even
with airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to inflate
Warning
{
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of
an eye, anyone who is up
against, or very close to any
airbag when it inflates can be
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
is on the lower part of the
instrument panel.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
Warning
{
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Always secure children
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on
page 3-38 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3-40.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-16 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar
The driver knee airbag is below the
steering column. The front outboard
passenger knee airbag is below the
glove box.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and front
outboard passenger are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
The second row seat-mounted side
impact airbags, for vehicles with a
standard wheelbase and a factory
installed rear seat, are in the sides
of the rear seatback closest to
the door.
The roof-rail airbags, for vehicles
with a standard wheelbase and a
factory installed rear seat, are in the
ceiling above the side windows for
the driver, front outboard passenger,
and second row outboard
passengers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Warning
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
This vehicle is equipped with
airbags. See Airbag System on
page 3-24. Airbags are designed to
inflate if the impact exceeds the
specific airbag system's deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants. The vehicle has
electronic sensors that help the
airbag system determine the
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The roof-rail airbags, for vehicles
with an extended wheelbase or
vehicles without a factory installed
rear seat, are in the ceiling above
the front row side windows, for the
driver and front outboard
severity of the impact. Deployment
thresholds can vary with specific
vehicle design.
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries, mainly to the driver's or
front outboard passenger's head
and chest.
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie‐down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
passenger only.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-29
It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes depending
on the location of the impact.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not designed to inflate in frontal
impacts, near frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts.
The roof-rail airbags in vehicles with
an extended wheelbase and in
vehicles without a factory installed
rear seat are not intended to inflate
during a rollover.
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds depending on
whether the vehicle hits an object
straight on or at an angle, and
whether the object is fixed or
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
or wide.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
vehicle damage or repair costs.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is designed to inflate on the side of
the vehicle that is struck.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
rear impacts, or in many side
impacts.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes depending on the location
of the impact. In addition, the
roof-rail airbags are designed to
inflate in a severe frontal impact.
Roof-rail airbags are not designed
to inflate in rear impacts. Both
roof-rail airbags will inflate when
either side of the vehicle is struck,
or in a severe frontal impact.
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
In addition, the vehicle has
advanced technology frontal
airbags. Advanced technology
frontal airbags adjust the restraint
according to crash severity.
Knee airbags are designed to inflate
in moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal impacts. Knee airbags
are not designed to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,
or in many side impacts.
For airbag locations, see Where Are
the Airbags? on page 3-26.
The roof-rail airbags in vehicles with
a standard wheelbase and a factory
installed rear seat will also inflate if
the sensing system predicts that the
vehicle is about to roll over on
its side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3-28.
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
Warning
{
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts by
distributing the force of the impact
more evenly over the
What Will You See after
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they inflate. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
occupant's body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
Airbags? on page 3-26.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-31
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
The feature may also activate,
without airbag inflation, after an
event that exceeds a predetermined
threshold. You can lock the doors,
and turn off the interior lamps, and
turn off the hazard warning flashers
by using the controls for those
features.
other parts. The service manual
for the vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Warning (Continued)
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13-13 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13-14.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Warning
{
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the front
outboard passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator
will light on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag should be allowed
to inflate or not.
Warning
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the front
United States
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in a correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
outboard passenger frontal airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
Canada
Whenever possible, children aged
12 and under should be secured in
a rear seating position.
The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off will be visible
during the system check. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5-17.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger airbag(s), no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
inflate under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag inflates.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag, under certain conditions. No
other airbag is affected by the
passenger sensing system.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-33
.
There is a critical problem with
the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag and knee airbag,
depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly —
whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Warning (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbags are off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5-17.
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front outboard passenger
seat, always move the seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Warning
{
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on the front
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger airbag and
knee airbag if:
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front outboard
passenger seat.
.
The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbags are active.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
.
A front outboard passenger
For some children, including
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag if the system
determines that an infant is present
in a child restraint. If a child restraint
has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3-2.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
If a person of adult size is sitting in
the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. Use the
following steps to allow the system
to detect that person and enable the
front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag:
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbags for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child's size. It is better to secure
a child restraint in a rear seat.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 3-53 or Securing
Child Restraints (Front
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Passenger Seat) on page 3-55.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-35
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers. Also
remove laptops, or other
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
Warning (Continued)
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3-36 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
serious injury or even death. An
adult-sized occupant should not
ride in the front outboard
passenger seat, if the passenger
airbag off indicator is lit.
electronic devices.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
Safety belts help keep the
.
The passenger sensing system
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
may turn off the passenger
frontal airbag and passenger
knee airbag when liquid is
soaked into the seat. If this
happens, the off indicator will be
lit, and the airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel will also
be lit.
Warning
{
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
If the front outboard passenger
airbag is turned off for an
adult-sized occupant, the airbag
will not be able to inflate and help
protect that person in a crash,
resulting in an increased risk of
.
Liquid pooled on the seat that
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will turn on the
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag while a
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger
frontal airbag and passenger
knee airbag are turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
Warning (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
If the front passenger seat gets wet,
dry the seat immediately. If the
airbag readiness light is lit, do not
install a child restraint or allow
anyone to occupy the seat. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5-16 for important safety
information.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13-10.
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the
vehicle's frame, bumper system,
height, front end, or side sheet
metal, may keep the airbag system
from working properly. The
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
or other electronic device, is put on
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired, remove the object from
the seat.
Warning
operation of the airbag system can
also be affected by changing or
moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, any of the airbag
{
Warning
{
For up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-37
modules, ceiling or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring.
sensing system from properly
turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-31.
Caution
{
If an airbag covering is damaged,
opened, or broken, the airbag
may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
diagnostic module, and airbag
wiring.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
airbags, see Different Size Tires
and Wheels on page 10-56 for
additional important information.
In addition, the vehicle has a
If you have to modify your vehicle
because you have a disability and
you have questions about whether
the modifications will affect the
vehicle's airbag system, or if you
have questions about whether the
airbag system will be affected if the
vehicle is modified for any other
reason, call Customer Assistance.
See Customer Assistance Offices
on page 13-3.
coverings, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module
replaced. For the location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3-26. See your
dealer for service.
passenger sensing system for the
front outboard passenger position,
which includes sensors that are part
of the passenger seat. The
passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
GM covers, upholstery, or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any
object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This
could either prevent proper
Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash
Warning
{
Airbag System Check
A crash can damage the airbag
systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may not
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5-16.
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
Child Restraints
protect you and your
Older Children
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide, if available.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt
on page 3-18. If a comfort guide
is not available, or if the
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to
the booster seat.
page 5-16.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-39
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Warning
{
Never allow more than one child
to wear the same safety belt. The
safety belt cannot properly spread
the impact forces. In a crash, they
can be crushed together and
seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person
at a time.
Warning
{
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3-18.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
Warning (Continued)
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
the way back into the retractor,
but it cannot do this if it is
wrapped around a child’s neck.
If the shoulder belt is locked and
tightened around a child’s neck,
the only way to loosen the belt is
to cut it.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety
belts.
Warning
{
Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by
appropriate child restraints. Neither
the vehicle's safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed
for them.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck. The
shoulder belt can tighten but
cannot be loosened if it is locked.
The shoulder belt locks when it is
pulled all the way out of the
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
retractor. It unlocks when the
shoulder belt is allowed to go all
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
3-41
Warning
{
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
the front outboard seat, always
move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go.
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Warning
{
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
outboard seat. Secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
(Continued)
consideration not only the child's
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Warning
Warning
{
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. In a
crash, if an infant is in a
rear-facing child restraint, the
crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an
infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always
be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
The restraint manufacturer
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-43
Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat
Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
harness.
A booster seat is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat
inspection station. For CPST
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
Warning
{
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
Warning
{
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-46.
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-45
Whenever possible, children aged
12 and under should be secured in
a rear seating position.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
Warning (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great if the
airbag deploys.
compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others.
Warning
{
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, a
rear-facing child restraint should not
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3-31 for additional
information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
rear-facing and forward-facing child
seats can be properly installed
using either the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
use both the safety belts and the
LATCH anchorage system to secure
a rear-facing or forward-facing
child seat.
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
The LATCH anchorage system can
be used until the combined weight
of the child plus the child restraint is
29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
alone instead of the LATCH
anchorage system once the
combined weight is more than
29.5 kg (65 lbs).
Booster seats use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the child in
the booster seat. If the manufacturer
recommends that the booster seat
be secured with the LATCH system,
this can be done as long as the
booster seat can be positioned
properly and there is no interference
with the proper positioning of the
lap-shoulder belt on the child.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
LATCH attachments on the child
restraint are used to attach the child
restraint to the anchors in the
vehicle. The LATCH system is
designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier.
The following explains how to attach
a child restraint with these
attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Make sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint,
and also the instructions in this
manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
In order to use the LATCH system in
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. LATCH-compatible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-47
The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the child
restraint.
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each LATCH
seating position that will
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (2).
attachment (2) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
To assist in locating the lower
anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on
the filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
To assist in locating the top tether
anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the cover.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3-44 for
Rear Seat
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
3-49
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
Warning
{
To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injuries during a crash, do
not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured.
the way back into the retractor,
but it cannot do this if it is
wrapped around a child’s neck.
If the shoulder belt is locked and
tightened around a child’s neck,
the only way to loosen the belt is
to cut it.
Warning
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors or with
the safety belt, the child restraint
will not be able to protect the child
correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
Buckle any unused safety belts
behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
and tighten the belt behind the
child restraint after the child
restraint has been installed.
Warning
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck. The
shoulder belt can tighten but
cannot be loosened if it is locked.
The shoulder belt locks when it is
pulled all the way out of the
retractor. It unlocks when the
shoulder belt is allowed to go all
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
in the rear seat at the same time,
but you can install two of them.
If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the right
rear seating position, and install the
other one either in the left rear
seating position or in the center
seating position. If you need to
install child restraints in both the
center and left rear seating
Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use.
Caution
{
Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
positions, the one in the center
seating position will need to be
secured using the vehicle safety
belts instead of the LATCH anchors.
There are five lower LATCH anchors
in the rear seat.
.
Use anchors 1 and 2 when
If you need to secure more than one
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3-44.
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in the right rear seating
position.
.
Use anchors 3 and 4 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in the center rear seating
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-51
.
Use anchors 4 and 5 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in the left rear seating
position.
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Installing child restraints using
LATCH in the center and left rear
seating positions at the same time is
prohibited.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
the child restraint
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
1.2. For outboard rear seating
positions, put the head
restraint in the upright
position. See Head
instructions and the
following instructions:
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
Restraints on page 3-2.
1.3. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or
head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or
head restraint and around
the headrest or head
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-53
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
Warning
{
If the child restraint or vehicle seat
position does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-46 for how and
where to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-46 for top tether anchor
locations.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3-44.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
For outboard rear seat positions,
put the head restraint in the
upright position. See Head
Restraints on page 3-2.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-54
Seats and Restraints
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-55
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer instructions
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3-44
Warning
{
A child in a rear-facing child
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-46.
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the front
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the front
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3-31 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5-17 for more information,
including important safety
outboard passenger frontal airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No
one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
To remove the child restraint,
information.
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-56
Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to
secure the child restraint in this
position, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the
following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3-31 for additional
information.
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when the
vehicle is started. See
If the child restraint uses a top
tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-46 for top tether
anchor locations.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
belt if needed.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-17.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-57
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-58
Seats and Restraints
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3-31.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-1
To access, push on the cover and
release.
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Warning
{
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Do not store heavy or sharp
objects in storage compartments.
In a crash, these objects may
cause the cover to open and
could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Management
Instrument Panel Storage
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If equipped with storage behind the
climate control system, touch the
bottom of the climate control system
panel to open. There is a USB port
inside. See the infotainment manual.
Keep the storage area door closed
while driving.
Touch the bottom of the climate
control system panel to close.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Storage
Glove Box
Armrest Storage
Center Console Storage
Rear
To open, touch the button.
If equipped, there is a compact disc
player and MP3 connection inside.
Press the button and lift to access
the storage area. There is a power
outlet, auxiliary jack, USB port(s),
and SD card reader inside. See
Power Outlets on page 5-6 and the
infotainment manual.
Pull up on the lever to access the
storage area.
To access the cupholders, press the
long center button on the front edge
of the armrest.
Close the glove box manually.
If equipped, there are controls for
the rear window sunshade and/or
the infotainment system. See the
infotainment manual and Rear
Window Sunshade on page 2-25.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-3
Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
Push the cover forward to access.
There is a power outlet inside. To
close, push the cover again and
release.
There are cupholders in the center
console. Push and release on the
passenger side of the cover to
access the cupholders.
The cargo tie-downs can be used to
secure small loads and the
convenience net. See Convenience
Net on page 4-4, if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Storage
Cargo Management
System
Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a
convenience net in the trunk. The
net is attached to the cargo
tie-downs. Put small loads behind
the net. It can also be positioned
into an envelope to hold smaller
items inside. Do not use the net for
heavy loads.
To open the cargo management
system, push down on the rear of
the handle, then lift the handle up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-1
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Service Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Lane Departure Warning
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-2
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-32
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-36
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-37
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Engine Cooling System
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-23
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-24
Traction Control System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-39
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-39
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-39
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-39
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Object Detection System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-26
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Instruments and Controls
Ride Control System
Steering Wheel Controls
Controls
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-44
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
The infotainment system can be
operated by using the steering
wheel controls. See "Steering
Wheel Controls" in the infotainment
manual.
Steering Wheel
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-45 Adjustment
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Reminder
Heated Steering Wheel
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-46
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-55
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Universal Remote System
Press the control to move the tilt
and telescoping steering wheel up
and down or forward and rearward.
( (Heated Steering Wheel):
If equipped with a heated steering
wheel, press to turn on or off. An
indicator next to the button is lit
when the feature is turned on.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
The steering wheel takes about
three minutes to start heating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-3
INT (Intermittent Wipes): Move
the lever up to INT for intermittent
Wiper Parking
Horn
If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they
will immediately stop.
Press a on the steering wheel pad
wipes, then turn the x INT band
up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
to sound the horn.
If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
the wipers will restart and move to
the base of the windshield.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
If the windshield wipers are in use
for about six seconds while driving,
the exterior lamps come on
automatically if the exterior lamp
control is in AUTO. See “Lights On
with Wipers” under Automatic
Headlamp System on page 6-4.
If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are performing wipes due to
windshield washing, the wipers
continue to run until they reach the
base of the windshield.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
With the ignition in ACC/
1X (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down. For
several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
Rainsense™
For vehicles with Rainsense, a
sensor near the top center of the
windshield detects the amount of
water on the windshield and
controls the frequency of the
windshield wiper.
HI: Use for fast wipes.
LO: Use for slow wipes.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades and windshield before using
them. If frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
Damaged blades should be
Keep this area of the windshield
clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10-26.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
INT (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity
Control): Move the windshield
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
long the windshield washer had
been activated. See Washer Fluid
on page 10-22 for information on
filling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
When using an automatic car wash,
move the windshield wiper lever to
OFF. This disables the automatic
Rainsense windshield wipers.
wiper lever to INT. Turn the x INT
band on the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity.
With Rainsense, if the transmission
is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle
speed is very slow, the wipers will
automatically stop at the base of the
windshield.
Warning
{
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
The wiper operations return to
normal when the transmission is no
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle
speed has increased.
windshield, blocking your vision.
.
Turn the band up for more
sensitivity to moisture.
.
Compass
Turn the band down for less
n L (Windshield Washer): Pull
the windshield wiper lever toward
you to spray windshield washer fluid
and activate the wipers. The wipers
will continue until the lever is
released or the maximum wash time
is reached. When the windshield
wiper lever is released, additional
wipes may occur depending on how
sensitivity to moisture.
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna,
.
Move the windshield wiper lever
out of the INT position to
deactivate Rainsense.
This feature can be changed. See
“Rain Sense Wipers” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-5
The compass system is designed to
operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when a
GPS signal is restored and provide
a heading again. See Compass
Messages on page 5-37 for the
messages that may be displayed for
the compass.
Auto Set
Setting the Clock
When on, the time and date will
automatically update.
Time
To set the time:
To set auto set:
1. From the Home Page, press the
SETTINGS screen button, then
press Time and Date.
1. Press the SETTINGS screen
button, then press Time
and Date.
2. Press Set Time, then press + or
− to increase or decrease hours
or minutes, and change AM
or PM.
2. Press Set Time or Set Date.
3. Press Auto Set, then select
On-Cell Network or Off-Manual
to manually set the time
and date.
3. Press 12-24Hr for a 12 or
24 hour clock.
4. Press [ Back to go back to the
4. Press [ Back to go back to the
previous menu.
previous menu.
Clock
If auto timing is on, the time
displayed on the clock may not
update immediately when driving
into a new time zone.
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See “Home Page” in the
infotainment manual for information
about how to use the menu system.
Date
To set the date:
1. Press the SETTINGS screen
button and press Time and Date.
Clock Display
2. Press Set Date and press + or −
to increase or decrease month,
day, or year.
When on, the digital clock will
display on the infotainment screen.
3. Press [ Back to go back to the
previous menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
To set the clock display:
Certain accessory power plugs may
not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
Power Outlet 110 Volt
Alternating Current
1. Press the SETTINGS screen
button and press Time and Date.
If equipped with this power outlet on
the rear of the center console. It can
be used to plug in electrical
equipment that uses a maximum
limit of 150 watts.
2. Press Clock Display, then select
Off or On.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with
3. Press [ Back to go back to the
previous menu.
the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9-69.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Caution
{
Hanging heavy equipment from
the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty. The power
outlets are designed for
The vehicle has three accessory
power outlets:
.
Inside the front storage area
below the climate control
system.
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
.
Inside the center console.
An indicator light on the outlet turns
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, equipment requiring less
than 150 watts is plugged into the
outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
.
On the rear of the center
console.
Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in
equipment that exceeds the
Lift the cover to access the
accessory power outlet.
maximum 20 amps rating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-7
The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
if the equipment is not fully seated
into the outlet.
The power outlet is not designed for
To activate the cigarette lighter,
the following and may not work
properly, if this equipment is
plugged in:
push it into the heating element and
let go. The lighter pops out when it
is ready to be used.
.
If equipment is connected using
more than 150 watts or a system
fault is detected, a protection circuit
shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
Caution
{
Holding a cigarette lighter in while
it is heating does not let the
lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
.
Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply
such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
page 9-19. The power restarts when
equipment using 150 watts or less is
plugged into the outlet and a system
fault is not detected.
.
Medical equipment.
Cigarette Lighter
If equipped with cigarette lighters,
they are under the climate control
system inside the storage area and
on the rear of the center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Instruments and Controls
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-9
Instrument Cluster
English Base Cluster Shown, Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Instruments and Controls
English Uplevel Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-11
Reconfigurable Instrument
Cluster
There are four uplevel instrument
cluster display configurations to
choose from: Simple, Performance,
Balanced, or Enhanced.
Performance Configuration
Balanced Configuration
The Performance configuration has
two interactive display zones: one in
the center of the speedometer and
one in the lower left of the cluster
screen.
The Balanced configuration has
three interactive display zones: one
in the center of each of the gauges.
Simple Configuration
The Simple configuration has one
interactive display zone in the
center.
Enhanced Configuration
The Enhanced configuration has
three interactive display zones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
Use the five-way control on the right
side of the steering wheel to move
between the different display zones
and scroll through the different
displays.
or scroll through contacts. If there is
an active call, mute the phone or
switch to handset operation.
Cluster Application Displays
The cluster can display information
regarding Navigation, Audio, and
Phone. On the base cluster, a
speedometer can also be displayed
in the center zone.
Cluster Settings Menu
To enter the cluster settings menu:
To change the cluster configuration:
1. Use the five-way control on the
right side of the steering wheel
to find the Settings page in one
of the interactive display zones
on the cluster.
1. Find the Settings page in one of
the interactive display zones on
the cluster.
Navigation
If there is no active route, a
compass will be displayed. If there
is an active route, press SEL to end
route guidance or turn the voice
prompts on or off.
2. Press SEL to enter the
Settings menu.
2. Press SEL on the center of the
five-way control to enter the
Settings menu.
3. Scroll down to highlight Display
Layout. Then press SEL to
select it.
Audio
Units: Press SEL while Units is
highlighted to enter the Unit menu.
Choose English or metric units by
pressing SEL while the desired item
is highlighted. A checkmark will be
displayed next to the selected item.
While the Audio application page is
displayed, press SEL to enter the
Audio menu. In the Audio menu,
search for music, select from
favorites, or change the audio
source
4. Each layout in the menu is
represented by a small preview
image of the display layout.
Scroll up or down and highlight
the selection. Press SEL to
select the desired cluster
configuration.
Info Pages: Press SEL while Info
Pages is highlighted to select the
items to be displayed in the DIC info
displays. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5-29.
Phone
While the Phone application page is
displayed, press SEL to enter the
Phone menu. In the Phone menu,
if there is no active phone call, view
recent calls, select from favorites,
5. Exit the Display Layout menu by
pressing S.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-13
Display Layout: Press SEL while
Display Layout is highlighted to
change the configuration of the
uplevel cluster. See “Reconfigurable
Instrument Cluster” earlier in this
section.
The trip odometer is accessed and
Fuel Gauge
reset through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-29.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Open Source Software: Press
SEL while Open Source Software is
highlighted to display open source
software information.
Speedometer
Caution
{
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
If the engine is operated with the
rpm’s in the warning area at the
high end of the tachometer, the
vehicle could be damaged, and
the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the rpm’s
in the warning area.
Base Level
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows how far
the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Instruments and Controls
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
Uplevel Balanced Configuration,
Performance Similar
Uplevel Simple and Enhanced
Configurations
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
.
The gauge takes a few seconds
There is an arrow near the fuel
gauge pointing to the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There still is
a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-15
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
While driving under normal
operating conditions, if the needle
moves into the red area, the engine
is too hot. Pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
English Base Level
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
cluster.
Metric Base Level
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind the driver to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
Uplevel Balanced Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
on solid until the belt is buckled.
This cycle may continue several
times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
This cycle continues several times if
the passenger remains or becomes
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving.
module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 3-24.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor the chime
comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
reminder light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop, or other
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
The airbag readiness light comes on
for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
There is a passenger safety belt
reminder light near the passenger
airbag status indicator. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-31.
Warning
{
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag
system. The system check includes
the airbag sensor(s), passenger
sensing system, the pretensioners,
the airbag modules, the wiring, and
the crash sensing and diagnostic
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind passengers to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-17
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag are allowed to
inflate.
Warning (Continued)
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
United States
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag.
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5-44.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3-31 for
important safety information. The
passenger airbag status indicator is
in the overhead console.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or the on or off symbol, to let you
know the status of the front
Warning
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
If the light stays on, or comes on
on when the vehicle is placed in
Service Only Mode, as a check to
show it is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. See Ignition Positions on
page 9-15.
Warning (Continued)
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
When this light comes on, or is
flashing, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) also displays a
message.
Charging System Light
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5-36.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and diagnosis
and service might be required.
On some vehicles the charging
system light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on, but the
engine is not running, as a check to
show the light is working. It should
go out when the engine is started.
For vehicles with a reconfigurable
cluster, this light may not come on
when the ignition is turned on.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system also
assists the service technician in
correctly diagnosing any
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, helping to
maintain a clean environment. The
malfunction indicator lamp comes
malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-19
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
Caution
Caution (Continued)
{
If the vehicle is continually driven
with this light on, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
could lead to costly repairs not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10-3.
If the light continues to flash, stop
and park the vehicle. Turn the
vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
and restart the engine. If the light is
still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
Caution
{
The following may correct an
emission control system
malfunction:
Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake,
or fuel system of the vehicle or
the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the
same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause
this light to come on.
.
Make sure the capless funnel
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
adapter is removed, if fuel has
been added to the vehicle using
the capless funnel adapter. See
“Filling the Tank with a Portable
Gas Can” under Filling the Tank
on page 9-61. The diagnostic
system can detect if the adapter
has been left installed in the
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
Modifications to these systems
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
vehicle, allowing fuel to
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the
adapter removed should turn off
the light.
.
The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the vehicle is placed in Service
Only Mode and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come
on. See your dealer for
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
.
Check that good quality fuel is
used. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as
Depending on where you live, your
vehicle may be required to
participate in an emission control
system inspection and maintenance
program. For the inspection, the
emission system test equipment will
likely connect to the vehicle's Data
Link Connector (DLC).
efficiently as designed and may
cause stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
assistance in verifying proper
operation of the malfunction
indicator lamp.
.
The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines
that critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Fuel on page 9-59.
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-21
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
This light comes on briefly when the
Electric Parking Brake
Light
vehicle is turned on. If it does not
come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a
problem.
Brake System Warning
Light
If the light comes on and stays on,
there is a base brake problem.
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working.
Metric
English
Warning
{
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
This light comes on when the
parking brake is applied. If the light
continues flashing after the parking
brake is released, or while driving,
there is a problem with the Electric
Parking Brake system or another
system. A message may also
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Brake System
Messages on page 5-36.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Metric
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
message displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Brake
System Messages on page 5-36.
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. A chime may
also sound when the light comes on
steady.
Service Electric Parking
Brake Light
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
If the ABS light is the only light on,
the vehicle has regular brakes, but
the antilock brakes are not
functioning.
If both the ABS and the brake
system warning light are on, the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not
functioning and there is a problem
with the regular brakes. See your
dealer for service.
On some vehicles the service
electric parking brake light should
come on briefly when the vehicle is
in ON/RUN. If it does not come on,
have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn if there is a problem. For
vehicles with the reconfigurable
cluster, this light may not come on
when the vehicle is in ON/RUN.
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5-21 and Brake System
Messages on page 5-36.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If this light stays on, there is a
problem with a system on the
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
vehicle that is causing the parking
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer as
soon as possible. See Electric
Parking Brake on page 9-27. If a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-23
This light is amber and flashes as a
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
alert, to indicate that the lane
marking has been crossed.
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
Light
See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) on
page 9-57.
Vehicle Ahead Indicator
For some vehicles with the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system,
this light comes on briefly while
starting the vehicle. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced.
For some vehicles, this light comes
on briefly while starting the vehicle.
If it does not come on, have the
vehicle serviced.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,
this light may not come on when
starting the vehicle.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,
this light may not come on when
starting the vehicle.
If equipped, this indicator will
display green when a vehicle is
detected ahead and amber when
you are following a vehicle ahead
much too closely.
This light is green if LKA is available
to assist.
This light is green if LDW is on and
ready to operate.
LKA may assist by gently turning
the steering wheel if the vehicle
approaches a detected lane marking
without using the turn signal in that
direction. The LKA light will turn
amber.
This light changes to amber and
flashes to indicate that the lane
marking has been crossed without
using a turn signal in that direction.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9-50.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-56.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Instruments and Controls
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
Traction Off Light
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off. For vehicles with a
reconfigurable cluster, this light is in
the display area and it may not
come on when the ignition is
turned on.
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction
Control System (TCS) is also off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
button.
If the light is on and not flashing, the
TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak
system have been disabled. A DIC
message may display. Check the
DIC messages to determine which
feature(s) is no longer functioning
and whether the vehicle requires
service.
If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,
the system does not assist in
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the
TCS and the StabiliTrak systems
and the warning light turns off.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-25
If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working.
light goes off. For vehicles with the
Tire Pressure Light
reconfigurable cluster, this light may
not come on when starting the
vehicle.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
Caution
{
The engine coolant temperature
warning light indicates that the
vehicle has overheated. Driving
with this light on can damage the
engine and it may not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. See
Engine Overheating on
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light Is On Steady
page 10-19.
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when the
engine has overheated.
On some vehicles this light comes
on briefly while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally the indicator
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Tire Messages on
page 5-45. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10-45.
If this happens pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See
Engine Overheating on page 10-19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
Low Fuel Warning Light
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
This light should come on briefly as
the engine is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Operation on page 10-48.
This light is near the fuel gauge and
comes on briefly when the ignition is
turned on as a check to show it is
working. For vehicles with a
reconfigurable cluster, this light is in
the display area and may not come
on when the ignition is turned on.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Caution
{
Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
possible. Add oil if required, but if
the oil level is within the operating
range and the oil pressure is still
low, have the vehicle serviced.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
It also comes on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. The light turns off
when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-27
Security Light
High-Beam On Light
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) Light
On some vehicles the immobilizer
light should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light turns off.
For vehicles with the reconfigurable
cluster, this light may not come on
when the engine is started.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
This light should come on briefly as
the vehicle is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer. For vehicles with a
reconfigurable cluster, this light is in
the display area and may not come
on when the ignition is turned on.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6-3.
IntelliBeam® Light
This light comes on solid when
there is a problem with the AFL
system. It flashes when the system
is switching between lighting
modes. See Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) on page 6-5.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 2-19.
This light comes on when the
IntelliBeam system, if equipped, is
enabled.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
Adaptive Cruise Control Light
Lamps On Reminder
Door Ajar Light
This light is white when the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is
on and ready, and turns green when
the ACC is set and active. See
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9-35.
This light comes on when the
exterior lamps are in use. See
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
Cruise Control Light
For vehicles equipped with this light,
it comes on when a door is open or
not securely latched. Before driving,
check that all doors are properly
closed. See Door Ajar Messages on
page 5-38 for more information.
The cruise control light is white
when the cruise control is on and
ready, and turns green when the
cruise control is set and active.
See Cruise Control on page 9-32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-29
4. Press SEL while an item is
S or T : Press to move between
Information Displays
highlighted to select or deselect
that item. When an item is
selected, a checkmark will
appear next to it.
the interactive display zones in the
cluster. Press S to go back to the
previous menu.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC is displayed in the
instrument cluster. It shows the
status of many vehicle systems.
SEL (Select): Press to open a
menu or select a menu item. Press
and hold to reset values on certain
screens.
DIC Information Displays
The following is the list of all
possible DIC information displays.
Some of the information displays
may not be available for your
particular vehicle.
DIC Information Display
Options
The info displays on the DIC can be
turned on or off through the
Settings menu.
Speed (Base Cluster): Shows the
vehicle speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
1. Press SEL while viewing the
Settings page in one of the
interactive display zones on the
cluster.
Trip 1 or Trip 2 (Base
Cluster) / Trip 1 or Trip 2 and
Average Fuel Economy (Uplevel
Cluster): The Trip display shows
the current distance traveled, in
either kilometers (km) or miles (mi),
since the trip odometer was last
reset. The trip odometer can be
reset by pressing and holding SEL
while this display is active.
2. Scroll to Info Pages and
press SEL.
3. Press y or z to move through
y or z : Move SEL up or down to
the list of possible info displays.
go to the previous or next selection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
The Average Fuel Economy display
shows the approximate average
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
or miles per gallon (mpg). This
number is calculated based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
since the last time this menu item
was reset. This number reflects only
the approximate average fuel
economy that the vehicle has right
now, and will change as driving
conditions change. The Average
Fuel Economy can be reset along
with the trip odometer by pressing
and holding SEL while this display
is active.
Average Fuel Economy (Base
Cluster): Shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number is
calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
This number reflects only the
approximate average fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now, and
will change as driving conditions
change. The Average Fuel
per hour (mph). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this value. The average
speed can be reset by pressing and
holding SEL while this display is
active.
Timer: This display can be used as
a timer. To start the timer, press SEL
while this display is active. The
display will show the amount of time
that has passed since the timer was
last reset. To stop the timer, press
SEL briefly while this display is
active and the timer is running. To
reset the timer to zero, press and
hold SEL while this display is active.
Economy can be reset by pressing
and holding SEL while this display
is active.
Fuel Range: Shows the
Instantaneous Fuel Economy:
Shows the current fuel economy in
either liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number reflects
only the approximate fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and
changes frequently as driving
conditions change.
approximate distance the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
LOW will be displayed when the
vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel
range estimate is based on an
average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank.
Compass (Base Cluster): Shows
the direction the vehicle is driving.
Turn Arrow: Shows the next
maneuver when using route
guidance.
Estimated Time to Arrival: Shows
the estimated time until arrival at
your destination.
Average Speed: Shows the
average speed of the vehicle in
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-31
Distance to Destination: Shows
the distance to the destination when
using route guidance.
switches to the gap setting page.
This page shows the current gap
setting along with the vehicle ahead
telltale.
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system,
press and hold SEL for several
seconds while the Oil Life display is
active. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 10-11.
Speed Limit: Shows the current
speed limit. The information for this
page comes from a roadway
database.
Battery Voltage: Shows the
current battery voltage.
Oil Life: Shows an estimate of the
oil's remaining useful life.
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains.
Speed Warning: Allows the driver
to set a speed that they do not want
to exceed. To set the Speed
Tire Pressure: Shows the
approximate pressures of all four
tires. Tire pressure is displayed in
either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds
per square inch (psi). If the pressure
is low, the value for that tire is
shown in amber. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 10-47 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10-48.
Warning, press SEL when Speed
Warning is displayed. Press y or
z to adjust the value. This feature
can be turned off by pressing and
holding SEL while viewing this
page. If the selected speed limit is
exceeded, a pop-up warning is
displayed and a chime may sound.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 5-39. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil on page 10-9. In addition
to the engine oil life system
Vehicle Odometer (Base
Cluster): Shows the odometer.
Cruise Set Speed: Shows the
speed the cruise control or Adaptive
Cruise Control is set to.
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended. See
Maintenance Schedule on
Blank Page: Allows for no
information to be displayed in the
cluster info display areas.
Follow Distance Indicator: When
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
not engaged, the current follow time
to the vehicle ahead is displayed as
a time value on this page. When
ACC has been engaged, the display
page 11-4.
The Oil Life display must be reset
after each oil change. It will not
reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life
display accidentally at any time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
Head-Up Display (HUD)
Caution
{
Warning
If you try to use the HUD image
as a parking aid, you may
{
If the HUD image is too bright or
too high in your field of view, it
may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is
dark outside. Be sure to keep the
HUD image dim and placed low in
your field of view.
misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use
the HUD image as a parking aid.
The HUD information can be
displayed in various languages. The
speedometer reading and other
numerical values can be displayed
in either English or metric units.
HUD Display on the Vehicle
Windshield
If equipped with HUD, some
information concerning the
The language selection is changed
through the radio and the units of
measurement is changed through
the instrument cluster. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47 and
“Cluster Settings Menu” under
The HUD may display some of the
following vehicle information and
vehicle messages or alerts:
operation of the vehicle is projected
onto the windshield. The image is
projected through the HUD lens on
top of the instrument panel. The
information appears as an image
focused out toward the front of the
vehicle.
.
Speed
.
Tachometer
Instrument Cluster on page 5-9.
.
Audio
.
Phone
.
Navigation
.
Collision Alert
.
Cruise Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-33
.
.
Lane Departure or Lane Keeping
Assist
HUD Views
$ (Image Adjustment): Press
down or lift up to center the HUD
image. The HUD image can only be
adjusted up and down, not side
to side.
There are four views in the HUD.
Low Fuel
Some vehicle information and
vehicle messages or alerts may be
displayed in any view.
Some vehicle messages or alerts
displayed in the HUD may be
cleared by using the steering wheel
controls. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5-35.
! (Display View): Press to
select the display view. Each press
will change the display view.
D (Image Brightness): Lift up
and hold to brighten the display.
Press down and hold to dim the
display. Hold down to turn the
display off.
Metric
The HUD image will automatically
dim and brighten to compensate for
outside lighting. The HUD
brightness control can also be
adjusted as needed.
The HUD control is to the left of the
steering wheel.
English
The HUD image can temporarily
light up depending on the angle and
position of the sunlight on the HUD
display. This is normal.
To adjust the HUD image:
1. Adjust the driver seat.
2. Start the engine.
Speed View: This display gives the
speedometer reading (in English or
metric units), speed limit, Adaptive
Cruise Control speed, Lane
Departure Warning, and Vehicle
Ahead indicator. Some information
Polarized sunglasses could make
the HUD image harder to see.
Use the following settings to adjust
the HUD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
only appears on vehicles that have
these features, and when they are
active.
All HUD views may briefly display
audio information when the driver
uses the steering wheel controls to
adjust the audio settings appearing
in the instrument cluster.
Navigation View: This displays the
speed view along with Turn-by-Turn
Navigation information. The
compass heading is displayed when
navigation routing is not active.
Incoming phone calls appearing in
the instrument cluster, may also
display in any HUD view.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alerts
shown in the instrument cluster may
also be displayed in any HUD view.
Metric
Metric
Metric
English
Audio/Phone View: This displays
the speed view along with audio/
phone information. The current radio
station, media type, and incoming
calls may be displayed.
English
English
Performance View: This displays
the speedometer reading, rpm
reading, transmission positions, and
gear shift indicator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
.
.
.
HUD is adjusted to the proper
height.
Care of the HUD
Vehicle Messages
Clean the inside of the windshield to
remove any dirt or film that could
reduce the sharpness or clarity of
the HUD image.
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle or
some action that may be needed to
correct a condition. Multiple
messages may display one after the
other.
Polarized sunglasses are
not worn.
Windshield and HUD lens are
clean.
Clean the HUD lens with a soft cloth
sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe
the lens gently, then dry it.
If the HUD image is not correct,
contact your dealer.
The messages that do not require
immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
pressing SEL. The messages that
require immediate action cannot be
cleared until that action is
The windshield is part of the HUD
system. See Windshield
Replacement on page 10-27.
HUD Troubleshooting
Check that:
.
Nothing is covering the
HUD lens.
performed. All messages should be
taken seriously and clearing the
messages does not correct the
problem.
.
HUD brightness setting is not
too dim or too bright.
The following are some of the
vehicle messages that may be
displayed depending on the vehicle
content.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
TRANSPORT MODE ON
STEP ON BRAKE TO
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
This message is displayed when the
vehicle is in transport mode. Some
features can be disabled while in
this mode, including Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start,
and the vehicle alarm system. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service
to turn transport mode off.
This message is displayed if you
attempt to release the Electric
Parking Brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Electric Parking
Brake on page 9-27.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the
vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing features of
the vehicle that may be noticed. At
the point that features are disabled,
this message displays. Turn off
unnecessary accessories to allow
the battery to recharge.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
This message is displayed if the
Electric Parking Brake is on while
the vehicle is in motion. See Electric
Parking Brake on page 9-27.
Brake System Messages
BRAKE FLUID LOW
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 10-23.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
LOW BATTERY
This message may be displayed
when there is a problem with the
brake boost assist system. The
brake boost assist motor may be
heard and brake pedal pulsation
may be felt. This is normal under
these conditions. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10-24.
BRAKES OVERHEATED
This message is displayed when the
brakes are becoming overheated.
This may be seen when driving on
hills. Shift to a lower gear.
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-37
SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
PEDAL APPLIED
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the parking
brake. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message displays when
attempting to activate Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) when it is
temporarily unavailable. The ACC
system does not need service.
This message displays when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
active and the driver is pressing the
gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC
will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9-35.
Compass Messages
Dashes may be displayed if the
vehicle temporarily loses
communication with the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
This can occur under the following
conditions:
SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
.
The radar is not clean. Keep the
radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
entire front and/or rear of the
vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10-81.
This message displays when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
needs service. Take the vehicle to
your dealer.
Cruise Control Messages
ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET
TO XXX
SHIFT TO PARK BEFORE
EXITING
This message displays when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9-35.
.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection or
camera performance.
This message may display if
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
engaged holding the vehicle at a
stop, and the driver attempts to exit
the vehicle. Put the vehicle in
P (Park) before exiting.
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message displays when the
cruise control speed is set. See
Cruise Control on page 9-32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
IDLE ENGINE
Door Ajar Messages
Engine Cooling System
Messages
DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
ENGINE TEMP
A door open symbol will be
displayed on the DIC showing which
door is open. If the vehicle has been
shifted out of P (Park), a DOOR
OPEN message will also be
displayed. The DOOR OPEN
message may also be displayed if
the vehicle starts to move. Close the
door completely.
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
STOP ENGINE
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
HOOD OPEN
conditioning compressor turns back
on. The vehicle can continue to be
driven.
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood
is open. Close the hood completely.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
TRUNK OPEN
HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
This message will display along with
a symbol when the trunk is open.
Close the trunk completely.
COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD
COOLANT
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 10-19.
This message will display if the
coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
on page 10-16.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-39
message remains on, take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
See Engine Oil on page 10-9.
speed while this message is on, but
maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10-11, Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5-29, Engine
Oil on page 10-9, and Maintenance
Schedule on page 11-4.
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
ENGINE
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE
ENGINE
Key and Lock Messages
Engine Power Messages
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
NO REMOTE DETECTED
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the
transmitter battery may be weak.
See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-2.
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
On some vehicles, this message
displays when the engine oil level
may be too low. Check the oil level
before filling to the recommended
level. If the oil is not low and this
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
NO REMOTE KEY WAS
NUMBER OF KEYS
PROGRAMMED
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL
ON/OFF
DETECTED PLACE KEY IN
TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN
START YOUR VEHICLE
This message displays when
programming new keys to the
vehicle.
This message is displayed when the
exterior lamp control is in AUTO and
the lights have turned on or off. See
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6-4.
This message displays when trying
to start the vehicle if an RKE
transmitter is not detected. The
transmitter battery may be weak.
See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-2.
REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE
This message displays when
leaving the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter still inside.
XXX TURN INDICATOR
FAILURE
When one of the turn signals is out,
this message displays to show
which bulb needs to be replaced.
See Bulb Replacement on
page 10-28 and Replacement Bulbs
on page 10-29.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
NO REMOTE DETECTED
PRESS BRAKE TO RESTART
This message displays when the
battery in the RKE transmitter needs
to be replaced.
This message displays when
attempting to turn off the vehicle
and the RKE transmitter is no longer
detected. Restarting is allowed
without the RKE transmitter for
five minutes. Press the brake pedal
to restart the vehicle.
TURN SIGNAL ON
Lamp Messages
This message is displayed if the
turn signal has been left on. Turn off
the turn signal.
AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED
SERVICE
This message displays when the
AFL system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer. See
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
page 6-5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-41
.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection or
camera performance.
braking functions of the Auto
Collision Preparation feature. Some
last-second automatic braking
capability is still provided with the
Alert setting, but braking is less
likely to occur. See Active
Emergency Braking System on
page 9-52.
Object Detection System
Messages
This message may also be
displayed if there is a problem with
the StabiliTrak system.
24 GHz RADARS OFF
This message displays when driving
in certain areas where there may be
radar interference. Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC), Forward Collision
Alert (FCA), and the Active
Emergency Braking System may not
work or may not work as well. The
vehicle does not need service.
FORWARD COLLISION
ALERT OFF
AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP
UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when the
Forward Collision Alert has been
turned off.
This message displays when the
Active Emergency Braking System
has been unavailable for some time.
The Active Emergency Braking
System does not need service.
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED
CLEAN WINDSHIELD
AUTOMATIC COLLISION
PREP OFF
This message displays when the
camera is blocked. Cleaning the
outside of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror may correct the
issue. The Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) and the Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) systems will not
operate. Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC), Forward Collision Alert
(FCA), and the Active Emergency
Braking System may not work or
may not work as well.
This message displays when the
Active Emergency Braking System
has been turned off. See Active
Emergency Braking System on
page 9-52.
This can occur under the following
conditions:
.
The radar is not clean. Keep the
radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
entire front and/or rear of the
vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10-81.
AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP
REDUCED
This message displays when the
Active Emergency Braking System
has been set to the Alert setting.
This setting disables most automatic
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection or
camera performance.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
UNAVAILABLE
REAR AUTO BRAKE/PARK
ASSIST OFF
This message displays when
attempting to activate the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system
when it is temporarily unavailable.
The LDW system does not need
service.
This message displays when the
Parking Assist system has been
turned off or when there is a
temporary condition causing the
system to be disabled.
See Driver Assistance Systems on
page 9-43.
SERVICE AUTOMATIC
COLLISION PREP
REAR AUTO BRAKE AND
PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE
If this message displays, take the
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
system.
This message could be due to the
camera being blocked. Cleaning the
outside of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror may correct the
issue.
This message displays when
attempting to activate the parking
and backing features of the Driver
Assistance System when they are
temporarily unavailable. The system
does not need service.
SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST
SYSTEM
If this message displays, take the
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
system.
LANE KEEPING ASSIST
UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when the
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) and
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system is temporarily unavailable.
The LKA system does not need
service.
This can occur under the following
conditions:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Forward Collision Alert (FCA),
Active Emergency Braking System,
Assistance Systems for Parking or
Backing, Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA), and/or Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) system may not
work. Do not use these systems
until the vehicle has been repaired.
.
The radar is not clean. Keep the
radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
entire front and/or rear of the
vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10-81.
This message could be due to the
camera being blocked. Clean the
outside of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-43
need service. For cleaning, see
"Washing the Vehicle" under
Exterior Care on page 10-81.
SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF
If this message remains on after
continued driving, take the vehicle
to your dealer for service. Do not
use the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA),
Lane Departure Warning (LDW),
and Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
features.
This message indicates that the
driver has turned the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system off.
TAKE STEERING
If LKA does not detect active driver
steering, an alert and chime may be
provided. Move the steering wheel
to dismiss. See “Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA)” under Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) on page 9-56.
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
SYSTEM
If this message remains on after
continued driving, the vehicle needs
service. Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) features will not work. Take
the vehicle to your dealer.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Parking Assist
system. Do not use this system to
help you park. See your dealer for
service.
Ride Control System
Messages
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
SERVICE REAR AUTO BRAKE
AND PARK ASSIST
This message displays when there
is a problem with the AWD system.
This message could be set by a
number of issues. Some may
require service of the AWD system.
The vehicle will run in normal
two-wheel-drive mode when this
message has been set. This could
be caused by:
This message indicates that Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are
disabled either because the sensor
is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone, or the
vehicle is passing through an open
area, such as the desert, where
there is insufficient data for
This message displays if there is a
problem with the parking and
backing features of the Driver
Assistance System. Do not use this
system to help park or back the
vehicle. See your dealer for service.
operation. This message may also
activate during heavy rain or due to
road spray. The vehicle does not
.
A vehicle or an AWD system
electronics problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
.
Various vehicle electrical issues.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
TRACTION CONTROL ON
.
Worn out or overheated clutch
plates.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the StabiliTrak system.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned on. See Traction
Control/Electronic Stability Control
on page 9-29.
.
Loss of fluids.
If this message appears, stop when
it is safe to do so and turn off the
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message
does not appear, it is not necessary
to take your vehicle to the dealer.
If the message still displays or
appears again when you begin
driving, the system needs service.
See your dealer.
SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYSTEM
Airbag System Messages
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Magnetic Ride
Control system. See Magnetic Ride
Control on page 9-31. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE AIRBAG
This message displays if there is a
problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
Security Messages
SERVICE LEVELING SYSTEM
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). See Traction
Control/Electronic Stability Control
on page 9-29.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays when there
is a problem with the automatic rear
level control. See Automatic Level
Control on page 9-32. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off. See Traction
Control/Electronic Stability Control
on page 9-29.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-45
This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
the location of the low tire.
SERVICE KEYLESS START
SYSTEM
Service Vehicle Messages
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the pushbutton start
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the power steering
system and a chime may sound.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5-25.
Tire Messages
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 10-38, Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10, and Tire Pressure on
page 10-45.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10-48.
Starting the Vehicle
Messages
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. The
DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5-29.
PRESS BRAKE TO START
VEHICLE
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10-48.
This message is displayed when
attempting to start the vehicle
without first pressing the brake
pedal.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
This message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the tires
is low.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Transmission Messages
Washer Fluid Messages
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
This message displays if there is a
problem with the transmission. See
your dealer.
This message may display when the
washer fluid level is low. Fill the
windshield washer reservoir as soon
as possible. See Engine
SHIFT DENIED
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
This message displays when using
the Driver Shift Control (DSC) and
attempting to shift to a gear not
appropriate for the vehicle speed
and engine revolutions per
Compartment Overview on
page 10-5 for the location of the
windshield washer reservoir. Also,
see Washer Fluid on page 10-22.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
This message displays when ice
conditions are possible.
minute (rpm). See Manual Mode on
page 9-25.
Window Messages
OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/
PASSENGER WINDOW
Vehicle Speed Messages
SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
turning the ignition off if the vehicle
is not in P (Park).
SELECTED SPEED LIMIT
EXCEEDED
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you will
need to program each front window
for the express-up feature to work.
See Power Windows on page 2-23.
This message is displayed when the
vehicle speed is greater than the set
speed. See "Speed Warning" under
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-29.
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Language (Language)
5-47
Personalization Menus
Vehicle
Personalization
The following list of menu items may
be available:
Select Language, then select from
the available language(s).
Use the audio system controls to
access the personalization menus
for customizing vehicle features.
.
Time and Date
The selected language will display
on the system, and voice
recognition will reflect the selected
language.
.
Language (Language)
.
Valet Mode
The following are all possible
personalization features. Depending
on the vehicle, some may not be
available.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Teen Driver
Radio
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
This will lock the infotainment
system and steering wheel controls.
It may also limit top speed, power,
and access to vehicle storage
locations (if equipped).
Vehicle
Infotainment System Audio
System Controls
Bluetooth
Voice
To access the
personalization menu:
Display
To enable valet mode:
1. Press SETTINGS on the Home
Page on the infotainment system
display.
Rear Camera
Return to Factory Settings
Software Information
1. Enter a four-digit code on the
keypad.
2. Press Enter to go to the
confirmation screen.
2. Press the desired feature to
display a list of available
options.
Each menu is detailed in the
following information.
3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
3. Press to select the desired
feature setting.
Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock or
unlock the system. Press Back to go
back to the previous menu.
Time and Date
Manually set the time and date. See
Clock on page 5-5.
4. Press S Back to exit or move
backward in a menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
Audio Volume Limit
Change PIN
Teen Driver (If Equipped)
This allows a maximum radio
volume to be set. See “Teen Driver”
in “Settings” in the infotainment
manual.
This allows the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) to be
changed. See “Teen Driver” in
“Settings” in the infotainment
manual.
Press and the following may
display:
.
View Report Card
.
Manage Settings
Select Off or On.
.
Change PIN
Key Registration
Teen Driver Speed Limiter
.
Key Registration
This allows the key to be registered.
See “Teen Driver Key Registration”
in “Settings” in the infotainment
manual.
If equipped, this allows the
maximum speed limit of the vehicle
to be set. See “Teen Driver” in
“Settings” in the infotainment
manual.
.
Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
View Report Card
This allows the driver’s driving
habits to be viewed. See “Teen
Driver” in “Settings” in the
infotainment manual.
Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
Select Off or On.
This allows all Teen Driver keys and
PIN to be cleared.
Teen Driver Speed Warning
Select Continue or Cancel.
Manage Settings
This allows a warning to be set
when a certain speed is exceeded.
See “Teen Driver” in “Settings” in
the infotainment manual.
Radio
Press and the following may
display:
Press and the following may
display:
.
Audio Volume Limit
Select Off or On.
.
.
Manage Favorites
Teen Driver Speed Limiter
.
.
Number of Favorites Shown
Teen Driver Speed Warning
.
Bose Audio Pilot
.
Maximum Start Up Volume
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-49
.
Air Quality Sensor
Manage Favorites
Maximum Start Up Volume
.
Auto Defog
This allows favorites to be edited.
See “Manage Favorites” in
“Settings” under “Radio” in the
infotainment manual.
This feature sets the maximum
startup volume. If the vehicle is
started and the volume is greater
than this level, the volume is
adjusted to this level.
.
Auto Rear Defog
Auto Fan Max Speed
This feature will set the maximum
auto fan speed.
Number of Favorites Shown
To set the maximum startup volume,
press + or − to increase or
decrease.
Press to set the number of favorites
to display.
Select Low, Medium, or High.
Air Quality Sensor
Select the desired number or select
Auto and the infotainment system
will automatically adjust the number
of favorites shown.
Vehicle
This allows for selection of air
quality sensor operation at high or
low sensitivity.
Select and the following may
display:
.
Climate and Air Quality
Bose Audio Pilot
Select Off, Low Sensitivity, or High
Sensitivity.
.
Collision/Detection Systems
This feature adjusts the volume
based on the noise in the vehicle.
See “Bose AudioPilot Noise
Compensation Technology” under
“Infotainment System Settings” in
the infotainment manual.
.
.
.
.
Auto Defog
Comfort and Convenience
Lighting
When set to On, the front defog will
automatically react to temperature
and humidity conditions that may
cause fogging.
Power Door Locks
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Select Off or On.
Select Off or On.
Climate and Air Quality
Select and the following may
display:
.
Auto Fan Max Speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-50
Instruments and Controls
Auto Rear Defog
Departure Warning, Adaptive Cruise
Control, Parking Assist, and
Backing Warning alerts.
Collision Preparation feature. See
Active Emergency Braking System
on page 9-52.
If equipped, this allows the Auto
Rear Defog to be turned on or off.
This feature will automatically turn
on the rear window defogger when it
is cold outside.
Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.
Select Off, Alert & Brake, or Alert.
Auto Collision Preparation
Go Notifier
This feature will turn on or off the
Forward Collision Alert feature as
well as the Automatic Braking
capability of the Auto Collision
Preparation feature. With the Alert &
Brake setting, both Forward
This feature will give a reminder that
Adaptive Cruise Control provides
when it has brought the vehicle to a
complete stop behind another
stopping vehicle, and then that
vehicle drives on.
Select Off or On.
Collision/Detection Systems
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following
may be displayed if equipped:
Collision Alert as well as the
Select Off or On.
.
Alert Type
Automatic Braking capability of the
Auto Collision Preparation feature
are available. The Alert setting
disables most automatic braking
functions of the Auto Collision
Preparation feature. Some
last-second automatic braking
capability is still provided with the
Alert setting, but it is much less
likely to be triggered by most driving
conditions. Off disables all Forward
Collision Alert and Automatic
Braking capabilities of the Auto
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
.
Auto Collision Preparation
This allows the Rear Cross Traffic
Alert feature to be turned on or off.
.
Go Notifier
.
.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Lane Change Alert
Select Off or On.
Lane Change Alert
Alert Type
This allows the Lane Change Alert
feature to be turned on or off.
This feature will set crash alerts to
beeps or seat vibrations. This
setting affects all crash alerts
including Forward Collision, Lane
Select Off or On.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-51
Select Off or On.
Select Off or On.
Comfort and Convenience
Select and the following may
display:
Chime Volume
Rain Sense Wipers
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
This allows the Rain Sense Wipers
feature to be disabled or enabled.
.
Auto Memory Recall
.
Easy Exit Options
Press + or − to adjust the volume.
Select Disabled or Enabled.
.
Chime Volume
Reverse Tilt Mirror
Lighting
.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
When on, both the driver and
passenger outside mirrors will tilt
downward when the vehicle is
shifted to R (Reverse) to improve
visibility of the ground near the rear
wheels. They will return to their
previous driving position when the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)
or the engine is turned off.
Select and the following may
display:
.
Auto Mirror Folding
.
.
Vehicle Locator Lights
Rain Sense Wipers
.
Exit Lighting
Auto Memory Recall
Vehicle Locator Lights
This feature automatically recalls
the current driver’s previously stored
1 or 2 button positions when
entering the vehicle. See Memory
Seats on page 3-8.
This feature will flash the exterior
lamps when K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed to locate the vehicle.
Select Off, On, On - Driver and
Passenger, On - Driver, or On -
Passenger.
Select Off, On - Driver Door Open,
or On - At ignition On.
Select Off or On.
Auto Mirror Folding
Exit Lighting
Easy Exit Options
When on, the outside rearview
mirrors will automatically fold or
unfold when the Remote Keyless
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
This feature automatically recalls
the current driver’s previously stored
exit button position when exiting the
vehicle. See Memory Seats on
page 3-8.
Entry (RKE) transmitter Q or K
button is pressed and held.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-52
Instruments and Controls
Select Off, 30 Seconds,
Delayed Door Lock
Remote Lock Feedback
60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors. To override the
delay, press the power door lock
switch on the door.
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Power Door Locks
Select and the following may
display:
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights
Only, or Horn Only.
Select Off or On.
.
Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
.
Auto Door Unlock
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the ventilated seats
on when using remote start on
warm days.
Select and the following may
display:
.
Delayed Door Lock
Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If Off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available.
.
Remote Lock Feedback
Select Off or On.
.
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the heated seats on
when using remote start on
cold days.
.
Passive Door Unlock
Select Off or On.
.
Passive Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
.
Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
Select Off or On.
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Passive Door Unlock
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
This allows the selection of what
doors will unlock when using the
button on the driver door to unlock
the vehicle.
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
Select Off or Flash Lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-53
Select All Doors or Driver Door.
Pair New Device
Voice
Select to pair a new device. See
Select and the following may
Passive Door Lock
“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”
under “Bluetooth” in the infotainment
manual.
display:
This feature can be turned on or off
or used to select feedback when
using the button on the driver door
to lock the vehicle. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-2.
.
Confidence Threshold
.
.
Prompt Length
Device Management
Audio Feedback Speed
Select to connect to a different
phone source, disconnect a phone,
or delete a phone.
Confidence Threshold
Select On, On with Horn Chirp,
or Off.
This feature allows the adjustment
of the sensitivity of the speech
recognition system.
Ringtones
Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
Press to change the ring tone for
the specific phone. The phone does
not need to be connected to change
the ring.
Select Confirm More or
Confirm Less.
This feature sounds an alert when
the RKE transmitter is left in the
vehicle.
Prompt Length
Select Off or On.
Voice Mail Numbers
This feature adjusts the voice
prompt length.
This feature displays the voice mail
number for all connected phones.
To change the voice mail number,
select EDIT or press the EDIT
button. Type a new number, then
select SAVE or press the SAVE
button.
Bluetooth
Select Short or Long.
Select and the following may
display:
Audio Feedback Speed
.
Pair New Device
This feature adjusts the audio
feedback speed.
.
Device Management
.
Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
Ringtones
.
Voice Mail Numbers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-54
Instruments and Controls
Restore Vehicle Settings
Display
Rear Camera
This allows selection of restoring
vehicle settings.
Select and the following may
display:
This allows for Rear Park Assist
Symbols, and Guidance Lines to be
turned off or on.
.
Select Restore or Cancel.
Mode
Select Off or On for the desired
feature.
.
Calibrate Touchscreen
Clear All Private Data
.
Turn Display Off
This allows selection to clear all
private information from the vehicle.
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-44.
Mode
Select Delete or Cancel.
Select to change the display screen
for day or night driving.
Return to Factory Settings
Restore Radio Settings
Select and the following may
display:
Select Auto, Day, or Night.
This allows selection to restore
radio settings.
.
Calibrate Touchscreen
Restore Vehicle Settings
Select Restore or Cancel.
.
Select to calibrate the touchscreen,
then follow the prompts.
Clear All Private Data
Software Information
.
Restore Radio Settings
Turn Display Off
Press to view the version of the
infotainment system software.
Select to turn the display off. Press
anywhere on the display area or any
faceplate button to turn the
display on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-55
home automation devices. These
instructions refer to a garage door
opener, but can be used for other
devices.
To program a garage door opener,
park outside directly in line with and
facing the garage door opener
receiver. Clear all people and
objects near the garage door.
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
Do not use the Universal Remote
system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any
garage door opener model
Make sure the hand-held transmitter
has a new battery for quick and
accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Universal Remote System
Programming
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Programming the Universal
Remote System
Read these instructions completely
before programming the Universal
Remote system. It may help to have
another person assist with the
programming process.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Remote system, call
1-800-355-3515 or see
www.homelink.com.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future programming.
Erase the programming when
vehicle ownership is terminated.
See “Erasing Universal Remote
System Buttons” later in this
section.
Programming involves
time-sensitive actions, and may time
out causing the procedure to be
repeated.
To program up to three devices:
If equipped, these buttons are in the
overhead console.
1. Hold the end of the hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
3 in) away from the Universal
Remote system buttons with the
indicator light in view. The
This system can replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-56
Instruments and Controls
hand-held transmitter was
supplied by the manufacturer of
the garage door opener receiver.
button is pressed, then
programming is complete.
There is no need to
complete Steps 4–6.
2. At the same time, press and
hold both the hand-held
.
If the indicator light does
not come on or the garage
door does not move, a
second button press may
be required. For a second
time, press and hold the
newly programmed button
for five seconds. If the light
stays on or the garage door
moves, programming is
complete.
transmitter button and one of the
three Universal Remote system
buttons to be used to operate
the garage door. Do not release
either button until the indicator
light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash. Then release both
buttons.
Learn or Smart Button
4. After completing Steps 1–3,
locate the Learn or Smart button
inside the garage on the garage
door opener receiver. The name
and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
Some garage door openers may
require substitution of Step 2
with the procedure under in
“Radio Signals for Canada and
Some Gate Operators” later in
this section.
.
If the indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds,
then changes to a solid light
and the garage door does
not move, continue with
programming Steps 4–6.
5. Press and release the Learn or
Smart button. Step 6 must be
completed within 30 seconds of
pressing this button.
3. Press and hold the newly
programmed Universal Remote
system button for five seconds
while watching the indicator light
and garage door activation.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and
hold the newly programmed
Universal Remote system button
for two seconds and then
release it. If the garage door
does not move or the lamp on
the garage door opener receiver
.
If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage
door moves when the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-57
does not flash, press and hold
the same button a second time
for two seconds, then release it.
Again, if the door does not move
or the garage door lamp does
not flash, press and hold the
same button a third time for
two seconds, then release it.
enough for the Universal Remote
system to pick up the signal during
programming.
Universal Remote System
Operation
Using the Universal Remote
System
If the programming did not work,
replace Step 2 under “Programming
the Universal Remote System” with
the following:
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote system button for
at least one-half second. The
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Press and hold the Universal
Remote system button while
pressing and releasing the
The Universal Remote system
should now activate the
garage door.
hand-held transmitter button every
two seconds until the signal has
been successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The
Universal Remote system indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
“Programming the Universal Remote
System” to complete.
Erasing Universal Remote
System Buttons
Repeat the process for
programming the two remaining
buttons.
Erase all programmed buttons when
vehicle ownership is terminated.
Radio Signals for Canada and
Some Gate Operators
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash. This should take
about 10 seconds.
For questions or programming help
call 1-800-355-3515 or see
www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws and
some U.S. gate operators require
transmitter signals to time out or quit
after several seconds of
2. Release both buttons.
transmission. This may not be long
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-58
Instruments and Controls
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote System
Button
To reprogram any of the system
buttons:
1. Press and hold any one of the
buttons. Do not release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 under “Programming
the Universal Remote System.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-1
Lighting Features
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9
Exterior Lighting Battery
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal lever.
Turn the control to the following
positions:
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
O (Off): Turns off the exterior
lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Turn to O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Lighting
In Canada, the headlamps will
automatically reactivate when the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
There is a sensor near the top
center of the windshield that
automatically controls the system.
Keep this area of the windshield
clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
This light comes on in the
instrument cluster when the
IntelliBeam system is enabled.
The high-beam headlamps remain
on, under the automatic control,
until one of the following situations
occurs:
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps including all lamps,
except the headlamps.
Turning On and Enabling
IntelliBeam
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the parking
lamps and instrument panel lights.
IntelliBeam® System
.
The system detects an
approaching vehicle's
headlamps.
To enable the IntelliBeam system,
with the turn signal lever in the
neutral position, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO. The blue
high-beam on light appears on the
instrument cluster when the high
beams are on.
.
The system detects a preceding
vehicle's taillamps.
If equipped, this system turns the
vehicle's high-beam headlamps on
and off according to surrounding
traffic conditions.
.
The outside light is bright
enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
The system turns the high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark
enough and there is no other traffic
present.
Driving with IntelliBeam
.
The vehicle's speed drops below
20 km/h (12 mph).
The system only activates the high
beams when driving over 40 km/h
(25 mph).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-3
.
.
The IntelliBeam system is
disabled by the high/low-beam
changer or the flash-to-pass
feature. If this happens, the high/
low-beam changer must be
activated two times within
two seconds to reactivate the
IntelliBeam system. The
instrument cluster light will come
on to indicate the IntelliBeam is
reactivated. See Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 6-3 and Flash-to-Pass on
page 6-3.
The other vehicle's lamps cannot
be detected due to dense
exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road
spray, mist, or other airborne
obstructions.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer): Push the turn signal
lever away from you and release, to
turn the high beams on. To return to
low beams, push the lever again or
pull it toward you and release.
.
.
The vehicle's windshield is dirty,
cracked, or obstructed by
something that blocks the view
of the light sensor.
The vehicle is loaded such that
the front end points upward,
causing the light sensor to aim
high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
The high beams may not turn off
automatically if the system cannot
detect another vehicle's lamps
because of any of the following:
.
Driving on winding or hilly roads.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument cluster when the
high-beam headlamps are on.
The automatic high-beam
headlamps may need to be disabled
if any of the above conditions exist.
.
The other vehicle's lamps are
missing, damaged, obstructed
from view, or otherwise
undetected.
Flash-to-Pass
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever toward you, and
release.
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A warning chime sounds if the driver
door is opened while the ignition is
off and the exterior lamps are on.
.
The other vehicle's lamps are
covered with dirt, snow, and/or
road spray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Lighting
The DRL turn off when the
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately. If it
is light outside when the vehicle
leaves the garage, there is a slight
delay before the automatic
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
DRL can make it easier for others to
see the front of your vehicle during
the day. Fully functional DRL are
required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada.
headlamps are turned to O or the
ignition is off.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When the exterior lamp control is
set to AUTO and it is dark enough
outside, the headlamps come on
automatically.
headlamp system changes to the
DRL. During that delay, the
instrument cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control
is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6-6.
For vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, the
dedicated DRL will come on when
all of the following conditions
are met:
.
The ignition is on.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
.
The exterior lamp control is
in AUTO.
.
The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
The automatic headlamp system
turns off when the exterior lamp
.
The parking brake is released or
the vehicle is not in P (Park).
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
There is a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Do not cover the
sensor.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, and other lamps
will not be on.
For vehicles sold in Canada, this
control only works when the
transmission is in P (Park).
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-5
To enable AFL, set the exterior lamp
control to the AUTO position.
Moving the control out of the AUTO
position will deactivate the system.
AFL will operate when the vehicle
speed is greater than 3 km/h
(2 mph). AFL will not operate when
the transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFL is not immediately operable
after starting the vehicle; driving a
short distance is required to
Lights On with Wipers
Hazard Warning Flashers
If the windshield wipers are
activated in daylight with the engine
on, and the exterior lamp control is
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
lamps, and other exterior lamps
come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on
wiper speed. When the wipers are
not operating, these lamps turn off.
Move the exterior lamp control to O
or ; to disable this feature.
calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
Curve Lighting
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
The light beam pivots based on the
steering wheel position and vehicle
speed of at least 10 km/h (6 mph).
The headlamps shine at an angle of
up to 15 degrees to the right or left
of the direction of travel.
| (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button on the center
stack to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press
again to turn the flashers off.
For vehicles with uplevel
headlamps, the AFL system adjusts
the headlamps to provide greater
road illumination in various driving
conditions.
The hazard warning flashers turn on
automatically if the airbags deploy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Lighting
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The turn and lane-change signal
can be turned off manually by
moving the lever back to its original
position.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change, the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
An arrow on the instrument cluster
flashes in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lighting and steering wheel
controls can be adjusted.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10-30.
D (Instrument Panel
Illumination): Move the
thumbwheel up or down to brighten
or dim the lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Reading Lamps
6-7
The brightness of the displays
automatically adjusts based on
outdoor lighting. The instrument
panel illumination control will set the
lowest level to which the displays
will automatically be adjusted.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamp is in the overhead
console.
There are reading lamps on the
overhead console and over the rear
passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened. To manually turn
the reading lamps on or off:
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps come on when
any door is opened and the dome
lamp is in the door position.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press:
OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
when a door is open.
Press m or n next to each
overhead console reading lamp.
DOOR: The lamp comes on when
a door is opened.
ON: Turns the lamp on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Lighting
This feature can be changed. See
“Vehicle Locator Lights” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, back-up
lamps, license plate lamps, outside
mirror lamps, exterior door handle
lamps, dome lamps, and most of
the interior lights turn on briefly at
night or in areas of limited lighting
Exit Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, back-up
lamps, parking lamps, outside mirror
lamps, license plate lamps, and
exterior door handle lamps come on
at night, or in areas with limited
lighting, when the driver door is
opened after the ignition is turned
off. The dome lamp comes on after
the ignition is changed to the OFF
position. The exterior lamps and
dome lamp remain on for a set
amount of time, then automatically
turn off.
when K is pressed on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-2.
When the driver door is opened, all
control lights, Driver Information
Center (DIC) lights, and door pocket
lights turn on. After about
30 seconds the exterior lamps turn
off, then the dome lamps and
remaining interior lights dim to off.
Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
Press the button near the rear
passenger reading lamps.
The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamp control off.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
pressing Q on the RKE transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-9
Battery Power Protection
The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.
If some interior lamps are left on
and the ignition is turned off, the
battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
some time.
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about
10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off, if the parking lamps or
headlamps have been manually left
on. This protects against draining
the battery. To restart the 10-minute
timer, turn the exterior lamp control
to the off position and then back to
the parking lamp or headlamp
position.
To keep the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, the ignition must be in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Lighting
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-1
Introduction
Infotainment
System
Infotainment
See the infotainment manual for
information on the radio, audio
players, phone, navigation system,
and voice or speech recognition.
It also includes information on
settings.
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear Climate Control
The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust the
heating, cooling, and ventilation.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Climate Control Buttons
1. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
4. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats (If
Equipped)
2. Fan Control
3. OFF (Fan)
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
6. Defrost
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Climate Controls
7. Rear Window Defogger
8. Recirculation
5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)
Climate Control Status Screen
6. Climate Control Selection
(Application Tray Button)
7. Rear (Rear Climate Control
Touch Screen)
8. Air Delivery Mode Control
Climate Control Touch Screen
The fan, air delivery mode, air
conditioning, driver and passenger
temperatures and SYNC settings
can be controlled by pressing
CLIMATE on the infotainment home
screen or the climate button in the
touch screen application tray.
A selection can then be made on
the front climate control page
displayed. See the infotainment
manual.
The climate control status screen
appears briefly when the climate
control buttons on the faceplate are
adjusted. The air delivery mode can
be adjusted on the climate control
status screen.
Climate Touch Screen Controls
1. Outside Temperature Display
2. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
3. Fan Control
Automatic Operation
4. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature)
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-3
When the indicator light is on or
AUTO is displayed on the touch
screen, the system is in full
automatic operation. If the air
delivery mode or fan setting is
manually adjusted, the auto
indicator turns off and the display
will show the selected settings. Auto
operation can be turned off
English units can be changed to
metric units through the instrument
cluster. See “ Cluster Settings
Menu” under Instrument Cluster on
page 5-9.
When the passenger settings are
adjusted, the SYNC button is
displayed when the temperatures
are unlinked.
Rear (If Equipped): Press this
button on the front climate control
touch screen to open the rear
climate control screen. The rear
climate control settings can now be
adjusted from the front
OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on
or off. The temperature control and
air delivery mode can still be
adjusted.
individually for climate settings.
w / x (Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature. Press
and hold to rapidly increase or
decrease the temperature.
For automatic operation:
1. Press AUTO.
passenger area.
Manual Operation
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
z 9 y (Fan Control): Press the
fan control buttons or the touch
screen fan control, to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Press and
hold the buttons or the touch screen
control to adjust speed more
needed for best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
may be automatically selected in
warm weather. The recirculation
The driver and passenger
temperatures can also be adjusted
by pressing the controls on the
touch screen.
quickly. The fan speed setting
displays. Pressing either button
cancels automatic fan control and
the fan can be controlled manually.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation. To turn off the fan and
climate control system, press and
hold the fan down button or touch
screen fan control until it is off.
light will not come on. Press @ to
select recirculation; press it again to
select outside air.
SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature): Press SYNC on the
touch screen to link all climate zone
settings to the driver settings. Adjust
the driver side temperature control
to change the linked temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: When
the climate information is displayed,
press the desired air delivery mode
on the touch screen to change the
direction of the airflow. The selected
air delivery mode button is lit.
Pressing any of the air delivery
buttons cancels automatic air
delivery control and the direction of
the airflow can be controlled
The climate control system may
have a sensor to detect air pollution.
When using automatic air
recirculation, the air quality control
system may operate. To adjust the
sensitivity of the air quality sensor,
see “Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield. Press the 0 button to
turn on or off. Changing the air
delivery mode also turns the
defrost off.
# (Air Conditioning): Press the
AC Mode touch screen control to
turn the automatic air conditioning
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
the outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
page 5-47.
@ (Recirculation): Press to
alternate between recirculating air
inside the vehicle or pulling in
outside air. The indicator light on the
button is lit when recirculation mode
is active. This helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle or reduce
the outside air and odors that might
enter.
manually. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
Automatic Air Recirculation:
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the air is automatically
recirculated as needed to help
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation;
recirculation runs automatically as
needed.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
Manual recirculation mode is not
available when in Defrost or Defog
modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-5
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
when the interior temperature is cold
and the outside temperature is
about 4°C (40°F) and below.
Driver and Passenger Heated and
Ventilated Seats (If Equipped):
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
The upper region of gridlines on the
rear window are antenna lines and
are not intended to heat when the
defogger is activated.
Press C or { to ventilate the driver
or passenger seat. See Heated and
Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3-11.
The heated outside rearview mirrors
turn on when the rear window
defogger button is on and help to
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirrors.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: If equipped with the
remote start feature, the climate
control system may run when the
vehicle is started remotely. The
system uses the driver’s previous
settings to heat or cool the inside of
the vehicle. The rear defog may
come on during remote start based
on cold ambient conditions. The
rear defog indicator light does not
come on during a remote start.
If equipped with heated or ventilated
seats, they may come on during a
remote start. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2-9 and Heated and
Ventilated Front Seats on
Caution
{
Rear Window Defogger
Do not try to clear frost or other
material from the inside of the
front windshield and rear window
with a razor blade or anything
else that is sharp. This may
damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect the
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation. See
“Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47. When Auto Rear Defog
is selected, the rear window
defogger turns on automatically
page 3-11.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Climate Controls
Sensor
Rear Climate Control
System
4. O (On/Off)
5. Temperature Control
If equipped, the rear climate control
system is on the rear of the center
console. The settings can be
adjusted with the rear climate
control buttons and the touch
screen.
The solar sensor, on top of the
instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
Rear Climate Touch Screen
Controls
1. Outside Temperature Display
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
2. Rear Climate Temperature
Control
Rear Climate Control Buttons
1. Heated Rear Seats (If Equipped)
2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
3. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperatures)
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
4. REAR O (On/Off)
5. Rear AUTO (Automatic
Operation)
3. MODE (Air Delivery Mode
Control)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-7
6. Front (Front Climate Control
Touch Screen)
SYNC: Press SYNC on the touch
screen to match the rear climate
control temperature to the front
climate control driver temperature.
The SYNC button will be lit. Press
the TEMP, MODE, or AUTO button
twice to unlink the set driver and
rear temperatures. The SYNC
button turns off.
Manual Operation
S A T (Fan Control): Press or
press and hold the front climate
control buttons or touch screen to
increase or decrease the rear
climate airflow.
7. Rear Control Lockout
8. Air Delivery Mode Control
Rear: Press this button on the front
climate control touch screen to open
the rear climate control screen. The
rear climate control settings can
now be adjusted from the front
passenger area.
+/− (Temperature Control): Press
or press and hold the rear
temperature control buttons or touch
screen to adjust the rear passenger
temperature. Press + for warmer air
and press − for cooler air.
Rear Control Lockout: Press to
lock or unlock control of the rear
climate control system from the rear
seat passengers. When locked, the
rear climate control can only be
adjusted from the front seat.
O (On/Off): Press the O button or
REAR O on the touch screen to turn
the rear climate control on or off.
If the rear climate control is turned
Y / \ /Y (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press the desired mode
button on the touch screen or the
MODE button on the rear faceplate
to change the direction of the airflow
in the rear seating area.
Automatic Operation
off using REAR O on the touch
screen, the rear climate control
buttons must be pressed twice to
Rear AUTO: Press to turn on or off.
The air delivery is controlled
automatically. The AUTO indicator
appears on the display. If the MODE
setting is manually adjusted, this
cancels full automatic operation.
turn the system back on. Press O
on the rear climate control faceplate
and within 5 seconds press the
MODE or temperature buttons on
the faceplate.
M or L (Heated Rear Seats, If
Equipped): Press M or L to heat
the left or right outboard seat
cushion and seatback. See Heated
Rear Seats on page 3-15.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Climate Controls
Operation Tips
Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel.
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
Move the slider knobs (2) to change
the direction of the airflow.
Additional air vents are beneath the
windshield and the driver and
passenger side door windows.
These are fixed and cannot be
adjusted.
.
Do not attach any devices to the
1. Thumbwheel
2. Slider Knob
air vent slats. This restricts
airflow and may cause damage
to the air vents.
Use the thumbwheels (1) near the
air vents to open or close off the
airflow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-9
During service, all refrigerants
should be reclaimed with proper
equipment. Venting refrigerants
directly to the atmosphere is harmful
to the environment and may also
create unsafe conditions based on
inhalation, combustion, frostbite,
or other health-based concerns.
Service
Maintenance
This vehicle may have the new
environmentally friendly refrigerant,
R1234yf. This refrigerant has a
significantly reduced global warming
impact on the environment,
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter reduces dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-4.
compared to the traditional
automotive refrigerant, R-134a. All
vehicles have a label underhood
that identifies the refrigerant used in
the vehicle.
The refrigerant system should only
be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. The air conditioning
evaporator should never be repaired
or replaced by one from a salvage
vehicle. It should only be replaced
by a new evaporator to ensure
proper and safe operation.
See your dealer regarding
replacement of the filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Cruise Control
9-1
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Parking over Things
Driving and
Operating
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-35
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Driver Assistance Systems
Driver Assistance
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Assistance Systems for
Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Assistance Systems for
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Active Emergency Braking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Side Blind Zone
Engine Exhaust
Driving Information
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-23
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-27
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-29
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . 9-57
Starting and Operating
Fuel
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Retained Accessory
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
California Fuel
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-31
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-31
Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-32
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-61
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Driving and Operating
.
.
Designate a front seat
passenger to handle potential
distractions.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Filling a Portable Fuel
Driving Information
Distracted Driving
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Become familiar with vehicle
features before driving, such as
programming favorite radio
stations and adjusting climate
control and seat settings.
Program all trip information into
any navigation device prior to
driving.
Distraction comes in many forms
and can take your focus from the
task of driving. Exercise good
judgment and do not let other
activities divert your attention away
from the road. Many local
governments have enacted laws
regarding driver distraction. Become
familiar with the local laws in
your area.
Trailer Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
.
Wait until the vehicle is parked
to retrieve items that have fallen
to the floor.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
To avoid distracted driving, always
keep your eyes on the road, hands
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
.
.
.
Stop or park the vehicle to tend
to children.
Keep pets in an appropriate
carrier or restraint.
.
Do not use a phone in
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to
place or receive necessary
phone calls.
Avoid stressful conversations
while driving, whether with a
passenger or on a cell phone.
.
Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
control a vehicle while driving.
9-3
.
.
Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
front of you.
Warning
{
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving.
Focus on the task of driving.
Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Braking
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
Refer to the CUE manual for more
information on using the CUE
system, if equipped.
Warning
{
reaction time.
Defensive Driving
Average driver reaction time is
about three-quarters of a second. In
that time, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft), which could be a lot of
distance in an emergency.
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking.
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3-16.
.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
include:
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and
other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready.
.
Keep enough distance between
Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
you and the vehicle in front
of you.
.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
.
Keep pace with traffic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Driving and Operating
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
If the steering wheel is turned until it
reaches the end of its travel and is
held against that position for an
extended period of time, power
steering assist may be reduced.
increases to provide a sport-like feel
to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
brakes. Doing so could make the
pedal harder to push down. If the
engine stops, there will be some
power brake assist but it will be
used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving
slowly, there may be a problem with
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer
than normal at slow speeds. See
your dealer for service.
If the steering assist is used for an
extended period of time, power
assist may be reduced.
Normal use of the power steering
assist should return when the
system cools down.
Hydraulic Power Steering
Steering
See specific vehicle steering
messages under Vehicle Messages
on page 5-35.
If the vehicle has hydraulic power
steering, it may require
maintenance. See Power Steering
Fluid (LF3 and LFX with AWD) on
page 10-21 or Power Steering Fluid
(LFX with FWD) on page 10-21.
Electric Power Steering
If the vehicle has electric power
steering it does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance
is not required.
Variable Effort Steering
Some vehicles have a steering
system that varies the amount of
effort required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or a
system malfunction, the vehicle can
be steered but may require
increased effort. See your dealer if
there is a problem.
If power steering assist is lost due
to a system malfunction, the vehicle
can be steered, but may require
increased effort.
The amount of steering effort
required is less at slower speeds to
make the vehicle more
maneuverable and easier to park. At
faster speeds, the steering effort
See your dealer if there is a
problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-5
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
these tips:
Steering in Emergencies
Caution
{
.
There are some situations when
steering around a problem may
be more effective than braking.
If the steering wheel is turned
until it reaches the end of its
travel, and is held in that position
for more than 15 seconds,
damage may occur to the power
steering system and there may be
loss of power steering assist.
1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer the vehicle so that it
straddles the edge of the
pavement.
.
Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn
180 degrees without removing
a hand.
.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
allows steering while braking.
Curve Tips
Off-Road Recovery
.
Take curves at a reasonable
speed.
3. Turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
.
Reduce speed before entering a
curve.
Loss of Control
.
Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve
Skidding
.
Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
There are three types of skids that
correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
.
Braking Skid — wheels are not
rolling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Driving and Operating
.
Steering or Cornering Skid —
too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force.
material on the road. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Warning
{
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
.
Acceleration Skid — too much
throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
.
Try to avoid sudden steering,
acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids
by taking reasonable care suited to
existing conditions, and by not
overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
.
Ease your foot off the
Driving on Wet Roads
accelerator pedal and steer the
way you want the vehicle to go.
The vehicle may straighten out.
Be ready for a second skid if it
occurs.
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
.
Slow down and adjust your
driving according to weather
conditions. Stopping distance
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
9-7
.
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10-38.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
could result in a loss of braking.
Shift the transmission to a lower
gear to let the engine assist the
brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Turn off cruise control.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
Warning
{
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
.
dangerous. This can cause
overheating of the brakes and
loss of steering. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle
in gear.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
Warning
{
Using the brakes to slow the
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
vehicle on a long downhill slope
can cause brake overheating, can
reduce brake performance, and
Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Driving and Operating
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
If equipped, Traction Control should
be turned on. See Traction Control/
Electronic Stability Control on
page 9-29.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use Roadside Service.
See Roadside Service on
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves vehicle stability during
hard stops on slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement.
Winter Driving
page 13-5. To get help and keep
everyone in the vehicle safe:
Driving on Snow or Ice
.
Turn on the hazard warning
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°
F) when freezing rain begins to fall,
resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain
until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
flashers.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
Warning
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9-26.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
9-9
Warning (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9-22.
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method. See Traction
Control/Electronic Stability Control
on page 9-29.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
Warning
{
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
“Climate Control Systems.”
above 56 km/h (35 mph).
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Driving and Operating
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Vehicle Load Limits
Warning (Continued)
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
between R (Reverse) and a low
forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry: the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Warning
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
Label Example
page 10-78.
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle center
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-11
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (1), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (2) in
kilograms and pounds.
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
placard.
If this is a professional vehicle, a
vehicle-specific Tire and
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
Loading Information label will be
provided and installed by the
final body manufacturer. The
Tire and Loading Information
label should be attached to the
B-pillar. See the final stage
manufacturer's manual or
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX"
amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb
equipment tires (3) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (4). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10-38 and
Tire Pressure on page 10-45.
contact them directly. The label
shows the original tires installed
on the professional vehicle, the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for those tires, and
the vehicle's capacity weight.
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs.)
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit–
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Driving and Operating
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this
Example 1
Example 2
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.”
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
See Trailer Towing on page 9-67
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
2. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-13
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Certification Label
If the vehicle is a professional
vehicle, the vehicle-specific
certification label is provided by
the final stage manufacturer.
The coach-builder should be
consulted if the final stage
manufacturer's label is not
present. The Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) label
should be on the center pillar
(B-pillar).
Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spread it out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification
label, found on the vehicle
3. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Driving and Operating
Warning
Warning
Warning (Continued)
{
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
(GVWR), or either the
.
.
Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless needed.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
If you put things inside the
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else —
they will go as fast as the
(Continued)
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-15
Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the
Engine/OFF.
Starting and
Operating
Caution (Continued)
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
New Vehicle Break-In
The transmitter must be in the
vehicle for the system to operate.
If the pushbutton start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the Keyless Access
system. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2-2.
Following break-in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
Caution
{
The vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will
perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
Ignition Positions
.
Do not drive at any one
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ON/RUN and the brake
pedal must be applied.
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km (500 mi).
Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
Stopping the Engine/OFF (No
Indicator Lights): When the
vehicle is stopped, press the
ENGINE START/STOP button once
to turn the engine off.
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
ignition will turn off, and Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-19.
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton
start.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the
ignition will return to ACC/
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
off. On vehicles with an
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber
Indicator Light): This mode allows
the use of some electrical
accessories when the engine is off.
ACCESSORY and display the
message SHIFT TO PARK in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Transmission Messages on
page 5-46. When the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park), the ignition
system will switch to OFF.
automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn
the ignition to the OFF position.
With the ignition off, pressing the
button one time without the brake
pedal applied will place the ignition
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Electric Parking Brake on
page 9-27.
The ignition will switch from ACC/
ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
rundown.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
Warning
{
Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
While driving, only shut the
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator
Light): This mode is for driving and
starting. With the ignition off, and
the brake pedal applied, pressing
the button once will place the
ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
Once engine cranking begins,
release the button. Engine cranking
will continue until the engine starts.
See Starting the Engine on
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
vehicle off in an emergency.
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
and must be shut off while driving,
press and hold the ENGINE START/
STOP button for longer than
two seconds, or press twice in
five seconds.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location.
page 9-17. The ignition will then
remain in ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-17
Service Only Mode
Caution
Caution
{
{
This power mode is available for
service and diagnostics, and to
verify the proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp as may
be required for emission inspection
purposes. With the vehicle off, and
the brake pedal not applied,
pressing and holding the button for
more than five seconds will place
the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
The instruments and audio systems
will operate as they do in ON/RUN,
but the vehicle will not be able to be
driven. The engine will not start in
Service Only Mode. Press the
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you
could damage the transmission.
Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
If you add electrical parts or
accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Add-On Electrical Equipment
on page 9-69.
Caution
{
Starting Procedure
If the steering wheel is turned
until it reaches the end of its
1. With the Keyless Access
system, the RKE transmitter
must be in the vehicle. Press the
ENGINE START/STOP button
with the brake pedal applied.
When the engine begins
travel, and is held in that position
while starting the vehicle, damage
may occur to the hydraulic power
steering system and there may be
loss of power steering assist.
button again to turn the vehicle off.
Starting the Engine
cranking, let go of the button.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). To restart the engine
when the vehicle is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
The idle speed will go down as
the engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it.
If the RKE transmitter is not in
the vehicle, if there is
interference, or if the RKE
transmitter battery is low, the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Driving and Operating
Driver Information Center (DIC)
will display a message. See Key
and Lock Messages on
page 5-39.
try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the button and
the accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing. This
clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
Caution
{
Cranking the engine for long
periods of time, by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
Engine Heater
cranking motor cool down.
The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
2. If the engine does not start after
five to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you press the ENGINE
The electrical cord is on the
driver side of the engine
compartment, between the
fender and the engine
compartment fuse block.
START/STOP button, for up to a
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-19
Check the heater cord for
damage. If it is damaged, do not
use it. See your dealer for a
replacement. Inspect the cord for
damage yearly.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
Warning (Continued)
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
recommended extension cord
in good operating condition,
or using a damaged heater or
extension cord, could make it
overheat and cause a fire,
property damage, electric
shock, and injury.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
Warning
{
.
Do not operate the vehicle
with the heater cord
permanently attached to the
vehicle. Possible heater cord
and thermostat damage could
occur.
Improper use of the heater cord
or an extension cord can damage
the cord and may result in
overheating and fire.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.
Plug the cord into a
three-prong electrical utility
receptacle that is protected
by a ground fault detection
function. An ungrounded
outlet could cause an electric
shock.
.
.
While in use, do not let the
heater cord touch vehicle
parts or sharp edges. Never
close the hood on the
heater cord.
.
Infotainment System
.
Power Windows
.
Sunroof (If Equipped)
.
Accessory Power Outlets
Before starting the vehicle,
unplug the cord, reattach the
cover to the plug, and
securely fasten the cord.
Keep the cord away from any
moving parts.
.
Power to the infotainment system
will continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
Use a weatherproof,
heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated
extension cord if needed.
Failure to use the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Driving and Operating
Power to the power windows and
sunroof will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until any door is
opened.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal. See if
you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Warning
{
All of these features will work when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
It could overheat and catch fire.
Shifting Into Park
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
apply the parking brake. See
Electric Parking Brake on
page 9-27.
Torque Lock
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
Torque lock is when the weight of
the vehicle puts too much force on
the parking pawl in the
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
3. Turn the ignition off.
page 9-20. If you are towing a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9-64.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-21
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10-75.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9-64.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Press the shift lever button.
Parking over Things
That Burn
Shifting out of Park
4. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Warning
{
This vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission shift lock
control system. The shift lock
control is designed to prevent
movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in
ON/RUN and the brake pedal is
applied.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
The shift lock control is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9-volt) battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Engine Exhaust
Warning (Continued)
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
Warning
{
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If the vehicle is left with the engine
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-20
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-22.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9-64.
.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.
The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-23
lever button pressed before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever, then push the shift lever all
the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9-21.
Automatic
Transmission
Warning
{
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Caution
{
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is moving forward could
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Shift to
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
P (Park): This position locks the
wheels. It is the best position to use
when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
page 9-20 and Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips
on page 9-64.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. The regular brake must be
fully applied first and then the shift
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Driving and Operating
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9.
Caution
Caution
{
{
Shifting out of P (Park) or
If the vehicle accelerates slowly,
or does not shift gears, the
transmission could be damaged.
Have the vehicle serviced
right away.
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
M (Manual Mode): This position
allows the driver to select the range
of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions.
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If more power is
needed for passing, and the
vehicle is:
Warning
{
In M (Manual Mode) the
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
transmission will shift as an
automatic until the Tap Shift controls
are used. Tap Shift activates driver
manual gear selection.
.
Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
See Manual Mode on page 9-25.
.
Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-25
Mode). Vehicles with this feature
have indicators on the steering
wheel. The controls are on the back
of the steering wheel. Tap the left
control to downshift, and the right
control to upshift. A Driver
Manual Mode
Drive Systems
Tap Shift
All-Wheel Drive
If equipped, this feature transfers
torque to the rear wheels as
required. It is fully automatic, and
adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in.
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into
2 (Second) gear. A higher gear ratio
allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) performance
is automatically reduced when you
use the compact spare. To restore
full AWD performance, and prevent
excessive wear to the clutch in the
AWD system, replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as possible. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10-73.
Tap Shift allows the driver to
manually control the automatic
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
shift lever must be in M (Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Driving and Operating
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses the wheels are
slowing down. If one of the wheels
is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at
each wheel.
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You may hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate. This is
normal.
When the vehicle begins to drive
away, ABS checks itself.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
A momentary motor or clicking noise
might be heard while this test is
going on, and it might even be
noticed that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows you to steer and brake
at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5-22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-27
The system has a red parking brake
status light and an amber parking
brake warning light. See Electric
Parking Brake Light on page 5-21
and Service Electric Parking Brake
Light on page 5-22. There are also
parking brake-related Driver
The red parking brake status light
will flash and then stay on once the
EPB is fully applied. If the red
parking brake status light flashes
continuously, then the EPB is only
partially applied or there is a
Electric Parking Brake
problem with the EPB. A DIC
Information Center (DIC) messages.
See Brake System Messages on
page 5-36. In case of insufficient
electrical power, the EPB cannot be
applied or released.
message will display. Release the
EPB and try to apply it again. If the
light does not come on, or keeps
flashing, have the vehicle serviced.
Do not drive the vehicle if the red
parking brake status light is flashing.
See your dealer. See Electric
Before leaving the vehicle, check
the red parking brake status light to
ensure that the parking brake is
applied.
Parking Brake Light on page 5-21.
The EPB switch is on the left side of
the instrument panel. The EPB can
always be activated, even if the
ignition is off. To prevent draining
the battery, avoid repeated cycles of
the EPB when the engine is not
running.
If the amber parking brake warning
light is on, lift up on the EPB switch
and hold it up. Continue to hold the
switch until the red parking brake
status light remains on. If the amber
parking brake warning light remains
on, see your dealer.
EPB Apply
To apply the EPB:
1. Be sure the vehicle is at a
complete stop.
2. Lift up the EPB switch
momentarily.
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is moving, the vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is
held up. If the switch is held up until
the vehicle comes to a stop, the
EPB will remain applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Driving and Operating
The vehicle may automatically apply
the EPB in some situations when
the vehicle is not moving. This is
normal, and is done to periodically
check the correct operation of the
EPB system.
brake status light is off. If either light
stays on after release is attempted,
see your dealer.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates. The
brake assist feature will
Caution
{
Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system
and cause premature wear or
damage to brake system parts.
Make sure that the parking brake
is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.
EPB Release
To release the EPB:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position.
Automatic EPB Release
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
The EPB will automatically release if
the vehicle is running, placed into
gear, and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
3. Push down momentarily on the
EPB switch.
The EPB is released when the red
parking brake status light is off.
preserve parking brake lining life.
If the amber parking brake warning
light is on, release the EPB by
pushing down on the EPB switch
and holding it down. Continue to
hold the switch until the red parking
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9-64.
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-29
StabiliTrak activates when the
system senses a discrepancy
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Ride Control Systems
This vehicle has an HSA feature,
which may be useful when the
vehicle is stopped on a grade
sufficient enough to activate HSA.
This feature is designed to prevent
the vehicle from rolling, either
forward or rearward, during vehicle
drive off. After the driver completely
stops and holds the vehicle in a
complete standstill on a grade, HSA
will be automatically activated.
During the transition period between
when the driver releases the brake
pedal and starts to accelerate to
drive off on a grade, HSA holds the
braking pressure for a maximum of
two seconds to ensure that there is
no rolling. The brakes will
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
Traction Control/
Electronic Stability
Control
System Operation
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an
electronic stability control system.
These systems help limit wheel slip
and assist the driver in maintaining
control, especially on slippery road
conditions.
If cruise control is being used and
traction control or StabiliTrak begins
to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
disengage. Cruise control may be
turned back on when road
conditions allow.
Both systems come on
TCS activates if it senses that any
of the drive wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. On an
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the
system will operate if it senses that
any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, TCS applies the brakes to
the spinning wheels and reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
automatically when the vehicle is
started and begins to move. The
systems may be heard or felt while
they are operating or while
performing diagnostic checks. This
is normal and does not mean there
is a problem with the vehicle.
automatically release when the
accelerator pedal is applied within
the two-second window. It will not
activate if the vehicle is in a drive
gear and facing downhill, or if the
vehicle is facing uphill and in
It is recommended to leave both
systems on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
R (Reverse).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Driving and Operating
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems
Off and On” later in this section.
If either system fails to turn on or to
activate, a message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), and
d comes on and stays on to
Turning the Systems Off
and On
indicate that the system is inactive
and is not assisting the driver in
maintaining control. The vehicle is
safe to drive, but driving should be
adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on:
1. Stop the vehicle.
The indicator light for both systems
is in the instrument cluster. This
light will:
2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds.
.
Flash when TCS is limiting
wheel spin.
3. Start the engine.
The button for TCS and StabiliTrak
is on the center stack.
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
and stays on, the vehicle may need
more time to diagnose the problem.
If the condition persists, see your
dealer.
.
Flash when StabiliTrak is
activated.
Caution
{
.
Turn on and stay on when either
system is not working.
Do not repeatedly brake or
accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle driveline could be
damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-31
To turn off only TCS, press and
Sport: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel,” or response to road
conditions.
and release the g button. The
Traction Off Light i and StabiliTrak
Off Light g in the instrument cluster
turn off and the appropriate DIC
message is displayed.
release the g button. The Traction
Off Light i displays in the
instrument cluster and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5-43. To turn
TCS on again, press and release
The vehicle is normally in Tour
Mode. Sport Mode is engaged when
the shift lever is placed in M
(Manual Mode). When the shift lever
is placed in D (Drive) the system will
revert back to Tour Mode.
Adding accessories can affect the
vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10-3.
the g button. The Traction Off Light
i displayed in the instrument
cluster will turn off and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed.
Magnetic Ride Control
The Magnetic Ride Control monitors
the suspension system.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
briefly displays the appropriate
message on vehicle startup or when
a new mode is selected. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5-43.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
Based on road conditions, steering
wheel angle, and vehicle speed, the
system automatically adjusts to
provide the best handling while
providing a smooth ride. The Tour
and Sport Modes will feel similar on
a smooth road.
the g button is pressed, the system
will not turn off until the wheels stop
spinning.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
press and hold the g button until
the Traction Off Light i and
StabiliTrak Off Light g come on and
stay on in the instrument cluster.
The appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5-43. To turn
TCS and StabiliTrak on again, press
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. When
traction is low, this feature allows
the drive wheel with the most
Tour: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
traction to move the vehicle. The
limited-slip rear axle also gives the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Driving and Operating
driver enhanced control when
cornering hard or completing a
maneuver, such as a lane change.
If the compressor runs often for
longer than one minute within the
same trip and the vehicle remains
low in the rear, see your dealer for
service.
Cruise Control
Warning
{
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear
suspension is available on some
vehicles.
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. Do not use
cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
If the vehicle is not used for several
weeks, the rear of the vehicle may
look low. When the engine is
started, the vehicle will return to the
proper height.
This type of level control is fully
automatic and will provide a better
leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
An air compressor connected to the
rear air springs will raise or lower
the rear of the vehicle to maintain
proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the engine is
running and will automatically adjust
vehicle height thereafter. The
system may exhaust (lower vehicle
height) for up to 10 minutes after the
engine has been turned off. You
may hear the air compressor
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being
used, it is recommended to allow
the air springs to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting
the hitch.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
operating when the height is being
adjusted; this is normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-33
If the Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control system begins to
limit wheel spin while using cruise
control, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See
Traction Control/Electronic Stability
Control on page 9-29. If a collision
alert occurs when cruise control is
activated, cruise control is
disengaged. See Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) System on page 9-50.
When road conditions allow the
cruise control to be safely used,
cruise control can be turned
back on.
(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,
press +RES up to the second
detent.
SET− (Set/Coast): Press the
control down briefly to set the speed
and activate cruise control. If the
cruise control is already active, use
to decrease vehicle speed. To
decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph),
press SET− down to the first detent.
To decrease speed to the next
5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the
speedometer, press SET− down to
the second detent.
J (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on and off. A white indicator
appears in the instrument cluster
when cruise is turned on.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
If the brakes are applied, cruise
control disengages.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): If
there is a set speed in memory,
press the control up briefly to
resume to that speed or press and
hold to accelerate. If the cruise
control is already active, use to
increase vehicle speed. To increase
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press
+RES up to the first detent. To
increase speed to the next 5 km/h
Setting Cruise Control
If the J button is on when not in
use, SET− or +RES could get
pressed and go into cruise when not
desired. Keep the J button off
when cruise is not being used.
1. Press J.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Driving and Operating
3. Press and release SET− . The
desired set speed briefly
appears in the instrument
cluster.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
If the cruise control system is
already activated:
4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.
.
.
Press and hold +RES up until
the desired speed is reached,
then release it.
Press and hold SET− down until
the desired lower speed is
reached, then release it.
When the cruise control has been
set to the desired speed, a green
cruise control indicator appears on
the instrument cluster and a cruise
set speed message appears on the
Head-Up Display (HUD),
.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
To decrease the vehicle speed in
small increments, briefly press
+RES up to the first detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.
small increments, briefly press
SET− down to the first detent.
For each press, the vehicle goes
about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
if equipped.
.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
To decrease the vehicle speed in
Resuming a Set Speed
larger increments, briefly press
+RES up to the second detent.
For each press, the vehicle
speed increases to the next
5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the
speedometer.
larger increments, briefly press
SET− down to the second
detent. For each press, the
vehicle speed decreases to the
next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the
speedometer.
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied or * is pressed, the
cruise control is disengaged without
erasing the set speed from memory.
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5-9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
The cruise control system may
automatically brake to slow the
vehicle down.
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
press +RES up to the first detent
briefly. The vehicle returns to the
previous set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-35
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5-9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
automatically brake to slow the
vehicle down. Also, you may have
to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. If the brake
pedal is applied, cruise control
disengages.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC), it allows the driver to
select the cruise control set speed
and following gap. Read this entire
section before using this system.
The following gap is the following
time between your vehicle and a
vehicle detected directly ahead in
your path, moving in the same
direction. If no vehicle is detected in
your path, ACC works like regular
cruise control. ACC uses camera
and radar sensors. See Radio
Frequency Statement on
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.
There are four ways to end cruise
control:
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Press *.
.
While pressing the accelerator pedal
or shortly following the release to
override cruise, briefly applying the
SET− switch will result in cruise set
to the current vehicle speed.
Shift the transmission to
N (Neutral).
page 13-12.
.
Press J.
If a vehicle is detected in your path,
ACC can apply acceleration or
limited, moderate braking to
Erasing Speed Memory
Using Cruise Control on Hills
The cruise control set speed is
maintain the selected following gap.
To disengage ACC, apply the brake.
If ACC is controlling your vehicle
speed when the traction control
system (TCS) or electronic stability
control system activates, the ACC
may automatically disengage.
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your
speed. When going downhill, the
cruise control system may
erased from memory if J is
pressed or if the ignition is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Driving and Operating
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-29.
When road conditions allow ACC to
be safely used, the ACC can be
turned back on.
Warning
{
Adaptive Cruise Control will not
detect or brake for children,
pedestrians, animals, or other
objects.
ACC will not engage if the TCS or
StabiliTrak electronic stability control
system is disabled.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when:
.
Warning
On winding and hilly roads or
{
when the sensors are
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
The system may not detect a
vehicle ahead. Keep the
entire front of the vehicle
clean.
ACC has limited braking ability
and may not have time to slow
the vehicle down enough to avoid
a collision with another vehicle
you are following. This can occur
when vehicles suddenly slow or
stop ahead, or enter your lane.
Also see “Alerting the Driver” in
this section. Complete attention is
always required while driving and
you should be ready to take
J (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on or off. The indicator turns
white on the instrument cluster
when ACC is turned on.
.
Visibility is low, such as in
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press the control up briefly to
resume the previous set speed or to
increase vehicle speed if ACC is
already activated. To increase
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press
+RES up to the first detent. To
increase speed to the next 5 km/h
(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,
press +RES up to the second
detent.
fog, rain, or snow conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is limited under
these conditions.
.
On slippery roads where fast
changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip.
action and apply the brakes. See
Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-37
SET– (Set/Coast): Press the
control down briefly to set the speed
and activate ACC or to decrease
vehicle speed if ACC is already
activated. To decrease speed by
1 km/h (1 mph), press SET− down to
the first detent. To decrease speed
to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on
the speedometer, press SET− down
to the second detent.
Select the set speed desired for
cruise. This is the vehicle speed
when no vehicle is detected in
its path.
The ACC indicator displays on the
instrument cluster and Head-Up
Display (HUD). When ACC is active,
the indicator will be lit green.
ACC will not set at a speed less
than 25 km/h (16 mph), although it
can be resumed when driving at
lower speeds.
Be mindful of speed limits,
surrounding traffic speeds, and
weather conditions when selecting
the set speed.
To set ACC:
Resuming a Set Speed
If the ACC is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied,
ACC is disengaged without erasing
the set speed from memory.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
ACC without erasing the selected
set speed.
1. Press J.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET–.
[ (Follow Distance Gap): Press
to select a following gap time (or
distance) setting for ACC of Far,
Medium, or Near.
To begin using ACC again, press
+RES up briefly. The vehicle returns
to the previous set speed.
4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.
After ACC is set, it may immediately
apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead
is detected closer than the selected
following gap.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get pressed and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control button off when cruise
is not being used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Driving and Operating
.
.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
larger increments, press +RES
up to the second detent. For
each press, the vehicle speed
increases to the next 5 km/h
(5 mph) mark on the
Press and hold SET– down until
the desired lower speed is
reached, then release it.
Increasing Speed While ACC is at
a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one
of the following:
To decrease the vehicle speed in
smaller increments, press SET−
down to the first detent. For
each press, the vehicle goes
about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
.
Use the accelerator to get to the
speedometer.
higher speed. Press SET– down.
Release the control and the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the higher
speed.
When it is determined that there is
no vehicle ahead or the vehicle
ahead is beyond the selected
following gap, then the vehicle
speed will increase to the set speed.
.
To decrease the vehicle speed in
larger increments, press SET−
down to the second detent. For
each press, the vehicle speed
decreases to the next 5 km/h
(5 mph) mark on the
When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, ACC will not brake
because it is overridden.
A warning message will appear
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) and Head-Up Display
(HUD). See Cruise Control
Messages on page 5-37.
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5-9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
speedometer.
The speedometer reading can be
displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on
page 5-9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed.
Reducing Speed While ACC is at a
Set Speed
.
Press and hold +RES up until
If ACC is already activated, do one
of the following:
the desired set speed appears
on the display, then release it.
Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
.
.
Use the brake to get to the
When a slower moving vehicle is
detected ahead within the selected
following gap, ACC will adjust the
vehicle's speed and attempt to
maintain the follow distance gap
selected.
To increase vehicle speed in
desired lower speed. Press
SET– down and release the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the lower
speed.
small increments, press +RES
up to the first detent. For each
press, the vehicle goes 1 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-39
Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward
Collision Alert (FCA) System on
page 9-50.
Approaching and Following a
Vehicle
Press [ on the steering wheel to
adjust the following gap. Each press
cycles the gap button through three
settings: Far, Medium, or Near.
Alerting the Driver
When pressed, the current gap
setting displays briefly on the
instrument cluster and HUD. The
gap setting will be maintained until it
is changed.
The vehicle ahead symbol is in the
instrument cluster and HUD display.
Since each gap setting corresponds
to a following time (Far, Medium,
or Near), the following distance will
vary based on vehicle speed. The
faster the vehicle speed, the further
back your vehicle will follow a
vehicle detected ahead. Consider
traffic and weather conditions when
selecting the following gap. The
range of selectable gaps may not be
appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions.
The vehicle ahead symbol only
displays when a vehicle is detected
in your vehicle’s path moving in the
same direction.
If ACC is engaged, driver action
may be required when ACC cannot
apply sufficient braking because of
approaching a vehicle too rapidly.
If this symbol is not displaying, ACC
will not respond to or brake to
vehicles ahead.
When this condition occurs, the
collision alert symbol on the HUD
will flash on the windshield. Either
eight beeps will sound from the
front, or both sides of the Safety
Alert Seat will pulse five times. See
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
ACC automatically slows the vehicle
down and adjusts vehicle speed to
follow the vehicle in front at the
selected follow gap. The vehicle
speed increases or decreases to
follow the vehicle in front of you, but
will not exceed the set speed. It may
apply limited braking, if necessary.
When braking is active, the brake
Changing the gap setting
automatically changes the alert
timing sensitivity (Far, Medium,
or Near) for the Forward Collision
page 5-47.
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Driving and Operating
lights will come on. The automatic
braking may feel or sound different
than if the brakes were applied
manually. This is normal.
ACC Automatically Disengages
traffic ahead before proceeding. In
addition, the left and right sides of
the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three
times, or three beeps will sound.
See ”Alert Type” and “Go Notifier” in
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
ACC may automatically disengage
and the driver will need to manually
apply the brakes to slow the
vehicle when:
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving
Objects
.
The sensors are blocked.
page 5-47.
.
The Traction Control System
Warning
{
(TCS) or electronic stability
control system has activated or
been disabled.
When the vehicle ahead drives
away, press +RES or the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
may not detect and react to
stopped or slow-moving vehicles
ahead of you. For example, the
system may not brake for a
vehicle it has never detected
moving. This can occur in
stop-and-go traffic or when a
vehicle suddenly appears due to
a vehicle ahead changing lanes.
Your vehicle may not stop and
could cause a crash. Use caution
when using ACC. Your complete
attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready
to take action and apply the
brakes.
accelerator pedal to resume cruise
control. If stopped for more than
two minutes or if the driver door is
opened and the driver safety belt is
unbuckled, the ACC automatically
applies the Electric Parking Brake to
hold the vehicle. The Electric
Parking Brake status light will turn
on. See Electric Parking Brake on
page 9-27. To resume ACC and
release the Electric Parking Brake,
press the accelerator pedal.
.
No traffic or other objects are
being detected.
.
There is a fault in the system.
The ACC active symbol will not be
displayed when ACC is no longer
active.
Notification to Resume ACC
ACC will maintain a follow gap
behind a detected vehicle and slow
your vehicle to a stop behind that
vehicle.
A DIC warning message may
display indicating to shift to P (Park)
before exiting the vehicle. See
Vehicle Messages on page 5-35.
If the stopped vehicle ahead has
driven away and ACC has not
resumed, the vehicle ahead symbol
will flash as a reminder to check
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
9-41
ACC Override
Warning
{
If using the accelerator pedal while
ACC is active, a DIC warning
message will indicate that automatic
braking will not occur. See Vehicle
Messages on page 5-35. ACC will
resume operation when the
accelerator pedal is not being
pressed.
If ACC has stopped the vehicle,
and if ACC is disengaged, turned
off, or canceled, the vehicle will
no longer be held at a stop. The
vehicle can move. When ACC is
holding the vehicle at a stop,
always be prepared to manually
apply the brakes.
accelerates up to the set speed,
especially when following a
vehicle exiting or entering exit
ramps. You could lose control of
the vehicle or crash. Do not use
ACC while driving on an entrance
or exit ramp. Always be ready to
use the brakes if necessary.
Warning
{
The ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes if your foot is
resting on the accelerator pedal.
You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you.
Warning
Warning
{
{
Leaving the vehicle without
placing it in P (Park) can be
dangerous. Do not leave the
vehicle while it is being held at a
stop by ACC. Always place the
vehicle in P (Park) and turn off
the ignition before leaving the
vehicle.
On curves, ACC may respond to
a vehicle in another lane, or may
not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into
a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready
to use the brakes if necessary.
Select an appropriate speed while
driving in curves.
Curves in the Road
Warning
{
On curves, ACC may not detect a
vehicle ahead in your lane. You
could be startled if the vehicle
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Driving and Operating
ACC may operate differently in a
sharp curve. It may reduce the
vehicle speed if the curve is too
sharp.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
ACC may detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the
brakes.
ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead
until it is completely in the lane. The
brakes may need to be manually
applied.
ACC may occasionally provide an
alert and/or braking that is
When following a vehicle and
entering a curve, ACC may not
detect the vehicle ahead and
accelerate to the set speed. When
this happens, the vehicle ahead
symbol will not appear.
considered unnecessary. It could
respond to vehicles in different
lanes, signs, guardrails, and other
stationary objects when entering or
exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. The vehicle does not
need service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-43
.
Do Not Use ACC on Hills and
When Towing a Trailer
Press J.
Driver Assistance
Systems
This vehicle may have features that
work together to help avoid crashes
or reduce crash damage while
driving, backing, and parking. Read
this entire section before using
these systems.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if J is
pressed or if the ignition is
turned off.
Cleaning the Sensing System
The camera sensor on the back of
the rearview mirror and the radar
sensors on the front of the vehicle
can become blocked by snow, ice,
dirt, or mud. These areas need to
be cleaned for ACC to operate
properly.
Warning
{
Do not use ACC when driving on
steep hills or when towing a trailer.
ACC will not detect a vehicle in the
lane while driving on steep hills. The
driver will often need to take over
acceleration and braking on steep
hills, especially when towing a
trailer. If the brakes are applied, the
ACC disengages.
Do not rely on the Driver
Assistance Systems. These
systems do not replace the need
for paying attention and driving
safely. You may not hear or feel
alerts or warnings provided by
these systems. Failure to use
proper care when driving may
result in injury, death, or vehicle
damage. See Defensive Driving
on page 9-3.
For cleaning instructions, see
“Washing the Vehicle” under
Exterior Care on page 10-81.
System operation may also be
limited under snow, heavy rain,
or road spray conditions.
Disengaging ACC
There are three ways to
disengage ACC:
(Continued)
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Press *.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
Some driver assistance features
alert the driver of obstacles by
beeping. To change the volume of
the warning chime, see “Comfort
and Convenience” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
When the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse), the RVC displays an
image of the area behind the vehicle
in the center stack display. The
previous screen displays when the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)
after a short delay. To return to the
previous screen sooner, press a
button on the infotainment system,
shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle
speed of 8 km/h (5 mph).
Under many conditions, these
systems will not:
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals.
If equipped with the Safety Alert
Seat, the driver seat cushion may
provide a vibrating pulse alert
instead of beeping. To change this,
see “Collision/Detection Systems”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
.
Detect vehicles or objects
outside the area monitored by
the system.
.
Work at all driving speeds.
.
Warn you or provide you with
enough time to avoid a crash.
.
Work under poor visibility or
Assistance Systems for
Parking or Backing
bad weather conditions.
.
Work if the detection sensor
If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera
(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),
Front Park Assist (FPA), Rear
Automatic Braking (RAB) and
Backing Warning System, Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), and
Automatic Parking Assist (APA) may
help the driver park or avoid objects.
Always check around the vehicle
when parking or backing.
is not cleaned or is covered
by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
Complete attention is always
required while driving, and you
should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes and/or steer
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
1. View Displayed by the
Camera
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-45
shorter during warmer or humid
weather. Blocked sensors will not
detect objects and can also cause
false detections. Keep the sensors
clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and
slush; and clean sensors after a car
wash in freezing temperatures.
Warning
{
The RVC system does not display
children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
crossing traffic, animals, or any
other object located outside the
camera's field of view, below the
bumper, or under the vehicle.
Perceived distances may be
different from actual distances.
Do not back the vehicle using
only the RVC screen. Failure to
use proper care before backing
may result in injury, death,
Warning
{
1. View Displayed by the
Camera
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper
The parking assist system does
not detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, animals, or objects
located below the bumper or that
are too close or too far from the
vehicle. It is not available at
speeds greater than 8 km/h
(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,
or vehicle damage, even with
parking assist, always check the
area around the vehicle and
check all mirrors before moving
forward or backing.
Displayed images may be farther or
closer than they appear. The area
displayed is limited and objects that
are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper do not
display.
or vehicle damage. Always check
behind and around the vehicle
before backing.
A warning triangle may display on
the RVC screen to show where the
Rear Parking Assist (RPA) has
detected an object. This triangle
changes from amber to red and
increases in size the closer the
object.
With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,
as the vehicle moves at speeds of
less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the
sensors on the bumpers may detect
objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and
1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle
within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off
the ground and below bumper level.
These detection distances may be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Driving and Operating
Alert Seat will pulse five times.
Beeps for Front Parking Assist are
higher pitched than for Rear Parking
Assist.
Warning
{
The Backing Warning System
only operates at speeds greater
than 8 km/h (5 mph). It does not
detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, animals, or objects
below the bumper or that are too
close or too far from the vehicle.
In some situations, such as at
higher backing speeds, there may
not be enough time for the short,
sharp application of the vehicle
brake system to occur. To prevent
injury, death, or vehicle damage,
even with the Backing Warning
System, always check the area
around the vehicle and check all
mirrors before backing.
Backing Warning and Rear
Automatic Braking
Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) have the Backing
Warning System and Rear
Automatic Braking (RAB) system.
The Backing Warning part of this
system can warn of rear objects
when backing up at speeds greater
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
The instrument cluster may have a
parking assist display with bars that
show “distance to object” and object
location information for RPA, and on
some vehicles, for the Front Parking
Assist system. As the object gets
closer, more bars light up and the
bars change color from yellow to
amber to red.
The Backing Warning System will
beep once from the rear when an
object is first detected, or pulse
twice on both sides of the Safety
Alert Seat. When the system
detects a potential crash, beeps will
be heard from the rear, or five
pulses will be felt on both sides of
the Safety Alert Seat. There may
also be a brief, sharp application of
the brakes.
When an object is first detected in
the rear, one beep will be heard
from the rear, or both sides of the
Safety Alert Seat will pulse two
times. When an object is very close
(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,
or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),
five beeps will sound from the front
or rear depending on object
When the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
and if it is backing too fast to avoid
a crash with a detected object
directly behind the vehicle, the Rear
Automatic Braking (RAB) system
location, or both sides of the Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
9-47
may automatically brake hard to a
stop to help avoid or reduce the
harm caused by a backing crash.
Warning (Continued)
Automatic Braking, always check
the area around the vehicle
before and while backing.
Braking system. Before releasing
the brakes, check the RVC
screen and check the area
around the vehicle to make sure it
is safe to proceed.
Warning
{
Rear Automatic Braking may not
avoid many types of backing
crashes. Do not wait for the
automatic braking to apply. This
system is not designed to replace
driver braking and only works in
R (Reverse) when an object is
detected directly behind the
vehicle. It may not brake or stop
in time to avoid a crash. It will not
brake for objects when the
vehicle is moving at very low
speeds. It does not detect
children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
animals, or objects below the
bumper or that are too close or
too far from the vehicle. To
Pressing the brake pedal after the
vehicle comes to a stop will release
the Rear Automatic Braking. If the
brake pedal is not pressed soon
after the stop, the Electric Parking
Brake (EPB) may be set. When it is
safe, press the accelerator pedal
firmly at any time to override the
Rear Automatic Braking.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
If equipped, RCTA displays a red
warning triangle with a left or right
pointing arrow on the RVC screen to
warn of traffic coming from the left
or right. This system detects objects
coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from
the left or right side of the vehicle.
When an object is detected, either
three beeps sound from the left or
right or three Safety Alert Seat
pulses occur on the left or right side,
depending on the direction of the
detected vehicle.
Warning
{
There may be instances where
unexpected or undesired
automatic braking occurs. If this
happens, either press the brake
pedal or firmly press the
prevent injury, death, or vehicle
damage, even with Rear
Use caution while backing up when
towing a trailer, as the RCTA
detection zones that extend out
accelerator pedal to release the
brakes from the Rear Automatic
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Driving and Operating
from the back of the vehicle do not
move further back when a trailer is
towed.
To turn the rear parking assist
symbols or guidance lines on or off,
see “Rear Camera” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
Warning (Continued)
soft or narrow, objects high off the
ground such as flatbed trucks,
or objects below ground level
such as large potholes. Always
verify that the parking space is
appropriate for parking a vehicle.
APA does not respond to changes
in the parking space, such as
movement of an adjacent vehicle,
or a person or object entering the
parking space. APA does not
detect or avoid traffic that is
behind or alongside of the
Turning the Features On or Off
RCTA can be turned on or off
through vehicle personalization. See
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Automatic Parking
Assist (APA)
The X button on the center stack
is used to turn on or off the Front
and Rear Parking Assist, Rear
Automatic Braking, and Backing
Warning System at the same time.
The indicator light next to the button
comes on when the features are on
and turns off when the features
have been disabled.
If equipped, APA searches for and
steers the vehicle into parallel and
perpendicular parking spots. When
using APA, you must still shift gears,
and control the brakes and
accelerator. The Driver information
Center (DIC) and audible beeps
help to guide parking maneuvers.
vehicle. Always be prepared to
stop the vehicle during the
parking maneuver.
The system is available when the
vehicle speed is below
Turn off parking assist and Rear
Automatic Braking when towing a
trailer.
Warning
{
30 km/h (18 mph). Press O on the
center stack to enable the system to
begin searching for a space that is
APA does not apply the brakes.
APA may not detect objects in the
parking space, objects that are
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-49
large enough to park. The system
cannot detect whether it is a legal
parking space.
If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), but
does not steer into the expected
space, this may be because the
system is maneuvering the vehicle
into a previously detected space.
The APA system does not need
service.
to avoid vehicles, pedestrians,
or objects. If the vehicle exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph), APA is
automatically disengaged. A DIC
progress arrow displays the status
of the parking maneuver. Depending
on the space size, additional
maneuvers may be required, and
there will be additional instructions.
When changing gears, allow the
automatic steering to complete
before continuing the parking
maneuver. APA will beep and
display a PARKING COMPLETE
message. Place the vehicle in
P (Park).
If the vehicle is equipped with
perpendicular parking mode, press
and hold O during the search
process to switch the APA parking
mode between perpendicular and
parallel parking.
APA searches for parking spaces to
the right of the vehicle. To search for
a parking space to the left, turn on
the left turn signal.
APA may automatically disengage if:
APA will instruct the vehicle to stop
once a large enough space is found.
Follow the instructions in the DIC.
When instructed to drive in reverse,
shift to R (Reverse) to engage
.
The steering wheel is used by
the driver.
.
The maximum allowed speed is
exceeded.
automatic steering. The steering
wheel will vibrate briefly as a
reminder to remove hands from the
steering wheel. Check surroundings
and continue braking or accelerating
as needed, and be prepared to stop
.
There is a failure with the APA
system.
After completely passing a large
enough space, an audible beep
occurs and a red symbol displays in
the DIC.
.
Electronic stability control or
antilock brakes are activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Driving and Operating
.
A high priority vehicle message
is displayed in the DIC.
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System
Warning
{
.
An incoming call is received
through a connected phone.
Disconnect the phone from the
vehicle to prevent APA from
disengaging.
FCA is a warning system and
does not apply the brakes. When
approaching a slower-moving or
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,
or when following a vehicle too
closely, FCA may not provide a
warning with enough time to help
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn
of pedestrians, animals, signs,
guardrails, bridges, construction
barrels, or other objects. Be ready
to take action and apply the
If equipped, the FCA system may
help to avoid or reduce the harm
caused by front-end crashes. When
approaching a vehicle ahead too
quickly, FCA provides a red flashing
alert on the windshield and rapidly
beeps or pulses the driver seat.
FCA also lights an amber visual
alert if following another vehicle
much too closely.
To cancel APA, press the APA
button again.
When the System Does Not Seem
to Work Properly
The APA system may require a
short period of driving along curves
to calibrate.
FCA detects vehicles within a
distance of approximately 60 m
(197 ft) and operates at speeds
above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the
vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC), it can detect vehicles to
distances of approximately 110 m
(360 ft) and operates at all speeds.
See Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9-35.
brakes. For more information, see
Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
Assistance Systems for
Driving
If equipped, when driving the
vehicle forward, Forward Collision
Alert (FCA), Lane Departure
Warning (LDW), Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA), Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA), and/or the Active
FCA can be disabled with the FCA
steering wheel control, or if your
vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), through
vehicle personalization. See the
“Auto Collision Preparation” portion
of “Collision/Detection Systems”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Emergency Braking System can
help to avoid a crash or reduce
crash damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-51
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
Warning (Continued)
or ice, or if the windshield is
damaged. It may also not detect a
vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
or in conditions that can limit
visibility such as fog, rain,
Without Head-Up Display
When your vehicle approaches
another detected vehicle too rapidly,
the red FCA display will flash on the
windshield. Also, eight rapid
or snow, or if the headlamps or
windshield are not cleaned or in
proper condition. Keep the
windshield, headlamps, and FCA
sensors clean and in good repair.
FCA warnings will not occur unless
the FCA system detects a vehicle
ahead. When a vehicle is detected,
the vehicle ahead indicator will
display green. Vehicles may not be
detected on curves, highway exit
ramps, or hills; or due to poor
visibility. FCA will not detect another
vehicle ahead until it is completely
in the driving lane.
high-pitched beeps will sound from
the front, or both sides of the Safety
Alert Seat will pulse five times.
When this Collision Alert occurs, the
brake system may prepare for driver
braking to occur more rapidly which
can cause a brief, mild deceleration.
Continue to apply the brake pedal
as needed. Cruise control may be
disengaged when the Collision Alert
occurs.
Collision Alert
Warning
{
FCA does not provide a warning
to help avoid a crash, unless it
detects a vehicle. FCA may not
detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
With Head-Up Display
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Driving and Operating
Tailgating Alert
The Collision Alert control is on the
Unnecessary Alerts
steering wheel. Press [ to set the
FCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near,
or on some vehicles, Off. The first
button press shows the current
setting on the DIC. Additional button
presses will change this setting. The
chosen setting will remain until it is
changed and will affect the timing of
both the Collision Alert and the
Tailgating Alert features. The timing
of both alerts will vary based on
vehicle speed. The faster the
FCA may provide unnecessary
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles
in other lanes, objects that are not
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
are normal operation and the
vehicle does not need service.
The vehicle ahead indicator will
display amber when you are
following a vehicle ahead much too
closely.
Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to
operate properly, cleaning the
outside of the windshield in front the
rearview mirror, and cleaning the
front of the vehicle where radar
sensors are located, may correct
the issue.
Selecting the Alert Timing
vehicle speed, the farther away the
alert will occur. Consider traffic and
weather conditions when selecting
the alert timing. The range of
selectable alert timings may not be
appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions.
Active Emergency
Braking System
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) it also has the Active
Emergency Braking System, which
includes Intelligent Brake
If your vehicle is equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
changing the FCA timing setting
automatically changes the following
gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic
Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
These systems can provide a boost
to braking or automatically brake the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-53
vehicle to help avoid or lessen the
severity of crashes when driving in a
forward gear.
Automatic Collision
Preparation (ACP) System
Warning (Continued)
.
Detect a vehicle ahead on
winding or hilly roads.
When driving in a forward gear
above 4 km/h (2.5 mph), ACP may
help reduce crash damage by
applying the brakes. It has a
detection range of approximately
60 m (197 ft). This front automatic
braking can only occur if a vehicle is
detected. This is shown by the FCA
vehicle ahead indicator being lit.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9-50.
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
.
.
Detect a stopped or
slow-moving vehicle or other
object ahead.
IBA may activate when the brake
pedal is applied quickly by providing
a boost to braking based on the
speed of approach and distance to
a vehicle ahead.
Detect a vehicle when
weather limits visibility, such
as in fog, rain, or snow. In
these situations, ACP sensor
performance is limited.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the brake pedal should
continue to be applied as needed.
IBA will automatically disengage
only when the brake pedal is
released.
Complete attention is always
required while driving, and you
should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes and/or steer
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Warning
{
ACP is an emergency crash
preparation feature and is not
designed to avoid crashes. Do
not rely on ACP to brake the
vehicle.
Warning
{
Brake Preparation
IBA may increase vehicle braking
in situations when it may not be
necessary. You could block the
flow of traffic. If this occurs, take
your foot off the brake pedal and
then apply the brakes as needed.
When quickly approaching a vehicle
ahead, Brake Preparation reduces
brake response time by having the
brake system prepared for driver
braking to occur more rapidly.
ACP may not:
.
Respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians, or animals.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Driving and Operating
Automatic Braking
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA)
If equipped, the SBZA system is a
lane-changing aid that assists
drivers with avoiding crashes that
occur with vehicles in the side blind
zone (or spot) areas. The SBZA
warning display will light up in the
corresponding outside side mirror
and will flash if the turn signal is on.
Warning (Continued)
If ACP detects it is about to crash
with the vehicle you are following
that is moving or has come to a
stop, and the brakes have not been
applied, it may automatically brake
hard. This can help to reduce crash
damage and it may even help to
avoid some very low speed crashes.
Automatic Braking may slow the
vehicle to a complete stop to try to
avoid a potential crash. If this
happens, Automatic Braking may
engage the Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.
To release the EPB, press the EPB
button. A firm press of the
It could respond to a turning
vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs,
and other non-moving objects. To
override Automatic Braking, firmly
press the accelerator pedal, if it is
safe to do so.
Automatic Braking can be disabled
or reduced through vehicle
personalization. See the “Auto
Collision Preparation” portion of
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Warning
{
SBZA does not alert the driver to
vehicles rapidly approaching
outside of the side blind zones,
pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. It may not provide
alerts when changing lanes under
all driving conditions. Failure to
use proper care when changing
lanes may result in injury, death,
or vehicle damage. Before
accelerator pedal will also release
Automatic Braking and the EPB.
Warning
{
Using the Automatic Collision
Preparation System while towing
a trailer could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and crash.
Turn the system off when towing
a trailer.
Warning
{
Automatic Braking may
automatically brake the vehicle
suddenly in situations where it is
unexpected and undesired.
making a lane change, always
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-55
zone starts at approximately the
middle of the vehicle and goes back
5 m (16 ft).
right side mirror display will light up
if a vehicle is detected in that blind
zone. If the turn signal is activated
in the same direction of a detected
vehicle, this display will flash as an
extra warning not to change lanes.
Warning (Continued)
check mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use the turn
signals.
How the System Works
The SBZA symbol lights up in the
side mirrors when the system
SBZA can be disabled through
vehicle personalization. See
“Collision Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47. If SBZA is disabled by
the driver, the SBZA mirror displays
will not light up.
detects a vehicle in the next lane
over that is in the side blind zone.
This indicates it may be unsafe to
change lanes. Before making a lane
change, check the SBZA display,
check mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use the turn signals.
SBZA Detection Zones
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
SBZA displays may not come on
when passing a vehicle quickly or
when towing a trailer. The SBZA
detection zones that extend back
from the side of the vehicle do not
move further back when a trailer is
towed. Use caution while changing
lanes when towing a trailer. SBZA
may alert to objects attached to the
vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,
or object extending out to either side
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
Display
Display
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
approximately one lane over from
both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m
(11 ft). The height of the zone is
approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. This
When the vehicle is started, both
outside mirror SBZA displays will
briefly come on to indicate the
system is operating. When the
vehicle is moving forward, the left or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Driving and Operating
of the vehicle. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
service.
If the SBZA displays do not light up
when vehicles are in the blind zone
and the system is clean, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle
to your dealer.
Warning
{
The LDW system does not steer
the vehicle. The LDW system
may not:
SBZA may not always alert the
driver to vehicles in the side blind
zone, especially in wet conditions.
The system does not need to be
serviced. The system may light up
due to guardrails, signs, trees,
shrubs, and other non-moving
objects. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
service.
When SBZA is disabled for any
reason other than the driver turning
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On
option will not be available on the
personalization menu.
.
Provide enough time to avoid
a crash.
.
Detect lane markings under
poor weather or visibility
conditions. This can occur if
the windshield or headlamps
are blocked by dirt, snow,
or ice; if they are not in
proper condition; or if the sun
shines directly into the
camera.
Radio Frequency Information
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
SBZA may not operate when the
SBZA sensors in the left or right
corners of the rear bumper are
covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
cleaning instructions, see "Washing
the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
page 10-81. If the DIC still displays
the system unavailable message
after cleaning both sides of the
vehicle toward the rear corners of
the vehicle, see your dealer.
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
.
Detect road edges.
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
crashes due to unintentional lane
departures. It may provide an alert if
the vehicle is crossing a lane
without using a turn signal in that
direction. LDW uses a camera
sensor to detect the lane markings
at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or
greater.
.
Detect lanes on winding or
hilly roads.
If LDW only detects lane
markings on one side of the road,
it will only warn you when
departing the lane on the side
where it has detected a lane
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-57
If the LDW system is not functioning
properly when lane markings are
clearly visible, cleaning the
windshield may help.
Warning (Continued)
marking. Always keep your
attention on the road and
maintain proper vehicle position
within the lane, or vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Always keep the
windshield, headlamps, and
camera sensors clean and in
good repair. Do not use LDW in
bad weather conditions.
LDW alerts may occur due to tar
marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
temporary or construction lane
markings, or other road
imperfections. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
service. Turn LDW off if these
conditions continue.
When LDW is on, @ is green if
LDW is available to warn of a lane
departure. If the vehicle crosses a
detected lane marking without using
the turn signal in that direction, @
changes to amber and flashes.
Additionally, there will be three
beeps, or the driver seat will pulse
three times, on the right or left,
depending on the lane departure
direction.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
How the System Works
If equipped, LKA may help avoid
crashes due to unintentional lane
departures. It may assist by gently
turning the steering wheel if the
vehicle approaches a detected lane
marking without using a turn signal
in that direction. It may also provide
a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system alert as the lane marking is
crossed. The LKA system will not
assist or provide an LDW alert if it
detects that you are actively
The LDW camera sensor is on the
windshield ahead of the rearview
mirror.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on
the center stack to the left of the
infotainment screen. The control
indicator will light when LDW is on.
The system may not detect lanes as
well when there are:
.
Close vehicles ahead.
.
Sudden lighting changes, such
as when driving through tunnels.
steering. Override LKA by turning
.
Banked roads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Driving and Operating
the steering wheel. LKA uses a
camera to detect lane markings
between 60 km/h (37 mph) and
180 km/h (112 mph).
Warning (Continued)
Warning
{
proper condition, or if the sun
shines directly into the
camera.
Using LKA while towing a trailer
or on slippery roads could cause
loss of control of the vehicle and
a crash. Turn the system off.
Warning
{
.
.
Detect road edges.
The LKA system does not
Detect lanes on winding or
hilly roads.
continuously steer the vehicle.
It may not keep the vehicle in the
lane or give a Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) alert, even if a
lane marking is detected.
How the System Works
The LKA camera sensor is on the
windshield ahead of the rearview
mirror.
If LKA only detects lane markings
on one side of the road, it will
only assist or provide an LDW
alert when approaching the lane
on the side where it has detected
a lane marking. Even with LKA
and LDW, you must steer the
vehicle. Always keep your
To turn LKA on and off, press A
on the center stack.
The LKA and LDW systems
may not:
.
Provide an alert or enough
steering assist to avoid a lane
attention on the road and
departure or crash.
maintain proper vehicle position
within the lane, or vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Always keep the
windshield, headlamps, and
camera sensors clean and in
good repair. Do not use LKA in
bad weather conditions.
.
Detect lane markings under
poor weather or visibility
conditions. This can occur if
the windshield or headlamps
are blocked by dirt, snow,
or ice, if they are not in
When on, A is green if LKA is
available to assist and provide LDW
alerts. It may assist by gently
(Continued)
turning the steering wheel and
display A as amber if the vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-59
.
.
Banked roads.
approaches a detected lane marking
without using a turn signal in that
direction. It may also provide an
Fuel
Roads with poor lane markings,
such as two-lane roads.
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. When
driving in the U.S. and Canada, to
help keep the engine clean and
maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend using
TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
See www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
LDW alert by flashing A amber
as the lane marking is crossed.
Additionally, there will be three
beeps, or the driver seat will pulse
three times, on the right or left,
depending on the lane departure
direction.
If the LKA system is not functioning
properly when lane markings are
clearly visible, cleaning the
windshield may help.
LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts
may occur due to tar marks,
shadows, cracks in the road,
temporary or construction lane
markings, or other road
imperfections. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
service. Turn LKA off if these
conditions continue.
The LKA system does not
continuously steer the vehicle.
If LKA does not detect active driver
steering, an alert and chime may be
provided. Move the steering wheel
to dismiss.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
The system performance may be
affected by:
.
Close vehicles ahead.
.
Sudden lighting changes, such
as when driving through tunnels.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 LFX
engine (VIN Code 3), use regular
unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Driving and Operating
specification D4814 with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. Do not
use gasoline with an octane rating
below 87, as it may cause engine
damage and will lower fuel
economy.
vehicle until the fuel is at one-half
tank or less, then refuel with the
current seasonal fuel.
Some gasolines, mainly high octane
racing gasolines, can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use
gasolines and/or fuel additives with
MMT as they can reduce spark plug
life and affect emission control
system performance. The
Prohibited Fuels
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
as reformulated gasolines are
available in some cities. If these
gasolines comply with the
previously described specification,
then they are acceptable to use.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
15% ethanol must be used only in
flex fuel vehicles.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 LF3
twin turbo engine (VIN Code 8), use
premium unleaded gasoline meeting
ASTM specification D4814 with a
posted octane rating of 91 or higher.
If the octane is less than 91,
damage to the engine may occur
and may void the vehicle warranty.
If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, see your dealer
for service.
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
Caution
{
Use of Seasonal Fuels
Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also
damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be
covered under the vehicle
warranty.
Use summer and winter fuels in the
appropriate season. The fuels
industry automatically modifies the
fuel for the appropriate season.
If fuel is left in the vehicle tank for
long periods of time, driving or
starting could be affected. Drive the
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Filling the Tank
9-61
vehicle may not pass a smog-check
test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5-18. If this occurs,
return to your authorized dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs may not be
Fuel Additives
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. See Fuel on
page 9-59.
Warning
{
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
violently and can cause injury or
death.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
not available, one bottle of Fuel
System Treatment PLUS added to
the fuel tank at every engine oil
change, can help. Fuel System
Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
.
To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the fuel
pump island.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If planning to drive in countries
outside the U.S. or Canada, the
proper fuel might be hard to find.
Check regional auto club or fuel
retail brand websites for availability
in the country where driving. Never
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
methanol, manganese, or any other
fuel not recommended. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper
fuel would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
.
Turn off the engine when
refueling.
.
Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away
from fuel.
.
Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended.
.
Do not reenter the vehicle
while pumping fuel.
.
Keep children away from the
fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
If equipped, the fuel door is locked
when the vehicle doors are locked.
Warning (Continued)
Press K on the RKE transmitter to
unlock. To open the fuel door, push
and release the rearward center
edge of the door.
.
Fuel can spray out if the
refueling nozzle is inserted
too quickly. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Insert the refueling
nozzle slowly and wait for
any hiss noise to stop prior to
beginning to flow fuel
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
The vehicle has a capless refueling
system and does not have a fuel
cap. The filling nozzle must be fully
inserted and latched prior to starting
fuel flow.
Filling the Tank with a Portable
Gas Can
If the vehicle runs out of fuel and
must be filled from a portable
gas can:
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds before removing the
nozzle. After initial shutoff, do not
partially remove the nozzle to add
more fuel as this will result in fuel
spillage. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10-81.
1. Locate the capless funnel
adapter from within the vehicle.
2. Insert and latch the funnel into
the capless fuel system.
Warning
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-63
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
Warning
Warning (Continued)
{
Attempting to refuel without using
the funnel adapter may cause fuel
spillage and damage the capless
fuel system. This could cause a
fire and you or others could be
badly burned and the vehicle
could be damaged.
.
Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
keep it in contact with the fill
opening until filling is
Warning
{
Filling a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle can cause
fuel vapors that can ignite either
by static electricity or other
complete.
.
.
.
means. You or others could be
badly burned and the vehicle
could be damaged. Always:
Fill the container no more
than 95% full to allow for
expansion.
3. Remove and clean the funnel
adapter and return to the storage
location.
.
Use approved fuel
Do not smoke, light matches,
or use lighters while
pumping fuel.
containers.
.
Remove the container from
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
bed before filling.
Avoid using cell phones or
other electronic devices.
.
Place the container on the
ground.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-64
Driving and Operating
.
.
.
Do not tow a trailer during the
first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent
damage to the engine, axle,
or other parts.
Trailer Towing
Warning
{
When towing a trailer, exhaust
gases may collect at the rear of
the vehicle and enter if the
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
window is open.
General Towing
Information
Then during the first 800 km
(500 mi) of trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
do not make starts at full throttle.
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
the entire section before towing a
trailer.
When towing a trailer:
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
Shift the transmission to a lower
gear if the transmission shifts
too often under heavy loads and/
or hilly conditions.
.
Do not drive with the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most
window open.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-78.
For towing the vehicle behind
another vehicle such as a motor
home, see Recreational Vehicle
Towing on page 10-78.
.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when towing.
The Automatic Collision
Preparation System should be
set to Off when towing. See
Active Emergency Braking
System on page 9-52.
Also adjust the climate
control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air.
See “Climate Control
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
Systems” in the Index.
.
Turn off Park Assist when
towing.
For more information about
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9-22.
Driving with a Trailer
When towing a trailer:
.
Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to
trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Caution (Continued)
9-65
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. The
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. The
combination you are driving is
longer and not as responsive as the
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
the handling and braking of the rig
before setting out for the open road.
The vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
combination will not accelerate as
quickly and is longer so it is
necessary to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before
returning to the lane.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so
the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
parts and attachments, safety
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the
combination moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes work.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
out, the arrows on the instrument
cluster will still flash for turns. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
During the trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure
and the lamps and any trailer
brakes still work.
guide you.
Making Turns
Following Distance
Driving on Grades
Caution
{
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before starting down a long or
steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to
come in contact with the vehicle.
braking and sudden turns.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-66
Driving and Operating
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
the transmission to a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
Parking on Hills
Warning
{
5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 10-19.
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
3. Shift into a gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
7. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when Trailer
Towing
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-4. Things that are
especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load.
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-67
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
the trip.
a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section.
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers, or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers, and cargo
in the tow vehicle must be
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, three
important considerations have to do
with weight:
.
Weight of the trailer.
subtracted from the maximum trailer
weight.
.
Weight of the trailer tongue.
.
Total weight on your vehicle's
tires.
Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
on page 13-3.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that can
be too heavy.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature, and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
The trailer tongue (1) should weigh
10 % of the total loaded trailer
weight (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-68
Driving and Operating
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Safety Chains
Towing Equipment
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
Tires
The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10. Make sure not to go over
the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
maintained properly.
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If so,
seal the holes when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well or
at all.
page 9-22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-69
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Caution
{
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle or cause
components to not work and
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-36 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-36.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-70
Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-1
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Power Steering Fluid
(LF3 and LFX
with AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Power Steering Fluid (LFX
with FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-25
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
Electrical System
Electrical System
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Windshield Replacement . . . 10-27
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-40
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Vehicle Care
Tire Terminology and
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-74
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Tire Pressure Monitor
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Different Size Tires and
Towing the Vehicle
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Recreational Vehicle
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
California Proposition
65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
Warning
{
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
It can be dangerous to work on
your vehicle if you do not have
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
not covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. See your
dealer to accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories
installed by a dealer technician.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13-10.
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories or
making modifications to the vehicle
can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3-36.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3-36.
Hood
To open the hood:
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 11-16.
Caution
{
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
find the secondary hood release
handle. The handle is under the
front edge of the hood near the
center. Push the handle to the
right and at the same time raise
the hood.
Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
contaminants to contact the fluids,
reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
1. Pull the hood release lever with
this symbol on it. It is inside the
vehicle on the lower side of the
instrument panel.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly. Then
bring the hood from full open to
within 15 cm (6 in) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front
center of the hood with a swift, firm
motion to fully close the hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-5
Engine Compartment Overview
3.6L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Vehicle Care
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10-13.
5. Engine Cover on page 10-8.
10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
(Battery Cover not Shown).
See Jump Starting on
page 10-75.
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10-14.
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(Under Engine Cover) (If
Equipped). See Power Steering
Fluid (LF3 and LFX with AWD)
on page 10-21 or Power
Steering Fluid (LFX with FWD)
on page 10-21.
11. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10-31.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10-22.
12. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
8. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10-16.
Starting on page 10-75.
3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10-9.
13. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10-22.
9. Battery on page 10-24 (Battery
Cover not Shown).
4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 10-9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-7
3.6L V6 Engine Twin Turbo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Vehicle Care
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10-13.
10. Battery on page 10-24 (Battery
Engine Cover
Cover not Shown).
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(Under Engine Cover). See
Power Steering Fluid (LF3 and
LFX with AWD) on page 10-21
or Power Steering Fluid (LFX
with FWD) on page 10-21.
11. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
(Battery Cover not Shown).
See Jump Starting on
page 10-75.
12. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10-31.
3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10-9.
13. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10-22.
4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10-9.
14. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
5. Engine Cover on page 10-8.
3.6L V6 Engine
Starting on page 10-75.
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10-14.
1. Engine Oil Fill Cap
2. Engine Cover Bolt
3. Engine Cover
7. Charged Air Coolant Reservoir
and Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10-16.
8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10-22.
9. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10-16.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-9
5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall
Checking Engine Oil
the engine cover.
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine oil.
Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
.
Always use engine oil approved
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
3.6L V6 Engine Twin Turbo
1. Engine Oil Fill Cap
2. Engine Cover Bolt
3. Engine Cover
.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
To remove:
Warning
1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
{
2. Remove the engine cover
bolt (2).
The engine oil dipstick handle
may be hot; it could burn you.
Use a towel or glove to touch the
dipstick handle.
.
.
Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10-11.
3. Raise the engine cover (3) to
release it from the retainers.
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
4. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Vehicle Care
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12-2.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Caution
{
When to Add Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-13.
Do not add too much oil. Oil
levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
Specification
Ask for and use engine oils that
meet the dexos1™ specification.
Engine oils that have been
approved by GM as meeting the
dexos1 specification are marked
with the dexos1 approved logo. See
www.gmdexos.com.
LFX 3.6L
LF3 3.6L Twin Turbo
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
this section for an explanation of
excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-11
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Caution
{
Failure to use the recommended
engine oil can result in engine
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Check with your
dealer or service provider on
whether the oil is approved to the
dexos1 specification.
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils meeting the
dexos1 specification are all that is
needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on a combination of factors which
include engine revolutions, engine
temperature, and miles driven.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
Viscosity Grade
What to Do with Used Oil
Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade
engine oil.
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29 °C
(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
will provide easier cold starting for
the engine at extremely low
temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
always select an oil of the correct
specification. See “Specification”
earlier in this section.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on page 5-39.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Vehicle Care
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition on with the
engine off.
1. Using the DIC controls on the
right side of the steering wheel,
display REMAINING OIL LIFE
on the DIC. See Driver
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-29. When remaining oil
life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
will appear on the display. See
Engine Oil Messages on
page 5-39.
The system is reset when the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message is off.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not been reset. Repeat
the procedure.
2. Press SEL on the DIC controls
and hold SEL down for a few
seconds to clear the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
and reset the oil life at 100%.
Be careful not to reset the oil life
display accidentally at any time
other than after the oil is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-13
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-4. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
See your dealer to have the fluid
and filter changed at the intervals
listed in the Maintenance Schedule
on page 11-4.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake it to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains
covered with dirt, a new filter is
required.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.6L V6 Engine
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-5.
1. Remove the seven screws on
top of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing.
2. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
the filter cover housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Vehicle Care
1. Screws
Warning
{
2. Secondary Air Hose
3. Lower Air Duct Clamp
4. Lower Electrical Connector
5. Upper Electrical Connector
6. Upper Air Duct Clamp
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
1. Disconnect the lower and upper
outlet ducts by loosening the
lower (3) and upper (6) air duct
clamps.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
2. Disconnect the lower (4) and
upper (5) electrical connectors
and wiring attachments from the
cover.
Caution
{
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
can easily get into the engine,
which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
3. Remove the screws (1) on top of
the cover.
4. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine.
5. Pull out the filter.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
3.6L V6 Engine Twin Turbo
7. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstall
the filter cover housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-15
Warning (Continued)
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Warning
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
3.6L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine Twin Turbo
1. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
(Out of View)
2. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
1. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
(Out of View)
2. Charged Air Coolant (CAC)
Bottle and Pressure Cap
3. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Warning
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
Vehicle Care
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10-19.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
Caution
{
Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause
What to Use
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner. Any repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
Warning
{
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or
.
Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
Engine Coolant
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
The engine and Charged Air
Coolant (CAC) cooling systems in
the vehicle are filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant
mixture. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11-13 and
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-4.
Caution
{
others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
If improper coolant mixture,
inhibitors, or additives are used in
the vehicle cooling system, the
engine could overheat and be
damaged. Too much water in the
The following explains the cooling
systems and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-17
If no coolant is visible in the coolant
surge tank or CAC bottle, add
coolant as follows:
Checking Coolant
Caution (Continued)
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
mixture can freeze and crack
engine cooling parts. The repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Use only the
proper mixture of engine coolant
for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and
How to Add Coolant to the
Surge Tank
The engine coolant surge tank and
CAC bottle are in the engine
compartment on the driver side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10-5.
Warning
{
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Lubricants on page 11-13.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the surge tank and CAC bottle.
If the coolant inside the surge tank
is boiling, do not do anything else
until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is
not at or above the mark pointed to
on the surge tank or at the CAC
bottle COLD FILL mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or pouring into sewers,
streams, or bodies of water. Have
the coolant changed by an
authorized service center, familiar
with legal requirements regarding
used coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
health.
Caution
{
This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
follow this procedure could cause
the engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
Be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
Vehicle Care
Warning
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
heard, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
How to Add Coolant to the
CAC Bottle
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn
the cap when the cooling system,
including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and surge tank pressure
cap to cool.
Warning
{
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture to the mark
pointed to on the front of the
coolant surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans. By this
time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be
lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the
coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the mark pointed to on
the front of the coolant
Caution
{
This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
follow this procedure could cause
the engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
The coolant surge tank pressure
cap can be removed when the
cooling system, including the surge
tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot.
surge tank.
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-19
There are also engine hot
Caution (Continued)
messages that may be displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Engine Cooling System
Messages on page 5-38.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10-20 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when one of these warnings
appears, but get service help right
away. See Roadside Service on
page 13-5.
The CAC bottle pressure cap can
be removed when the Charged Air
Coolant cooling system, including
the CAC bottle pressure cap, is no
longer hot.
If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise and remove it.
Warning
{
2. Fill the CAC bottle with the
proper mixture to the COLD FILL
mark pointed to on the front of
the CAC bottle.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, the fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
3. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
Engine Overheating
Caution
{
The vehicle has an engine coolant
temperature gauge and an engine
temperature light to warn of engine
overheating.
Running the engine without
coolant may cause damage or a
fire. Vehicle damage would not be
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20
Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
Warning (Continued)
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to a
safe place in an emergency
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral), and let the
engine idle.
If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If the temperature overheat gauge is
no longer in the overheat zone or an
overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally
and have the cooling system
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat
protection mode, which alternates
firing groups of cylinders, helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is significant loss in
power and engine performance.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
checked for proper fill and function.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on in the
instrument cluster, to indicate the
vehicle has entered overheated
engine protection operating mode.
The temperature gauge also
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
.
Tows a trailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-21
indicates an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended distances
and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
(LF3 and LFX with AWD)
Check the level when the engine
is cool.
The fluid level should be
between MIN and MAX on the
dipstick.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Remove the engine cover. Refer
to Engine Cover on page 10-8.
What to Use
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-13. Always
use the proper fluid.
The power steering fluid reservoir is
under the engine cover on the
passenger side toward the rear of
the engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-5.
3. Turn the cap counterclockwise
and pull it straight up.
4. Wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Power Steering Fluid
(LFX with FWD)
The vehicle has electric power
steering and does not use power
steering fluid.
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Vehicle Care
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10-5 for reservoir location.
Washer Fluid
Caution (Continued)
What to Use
expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank
if it is completely full.
When adding windshield washer
fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read
the manufacturer instructions before
use. If you will be operating your
vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Caution
{
Brakes
.
Do not use engine coolant
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time when the vehicle
is moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
Adding Washer Fluid
.
The appropriate message will
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the fluid level is
low. See Washer Fluid Messages on
page 5-46.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Warning
{
.
When using concentrated
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer instructions for
adding water.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid
10-23
Brake Pedal Travel
Caution
{
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service may be required.
Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly
brake repair.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Always replace brake system parts
with new, approved replacement
parts. If this is not done, the brakes
may not work properly. The braking
performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong
replacement brake parts are
installed or parts are improperly
installed.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-5 for the location of the
reservoir.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12-2.
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
Brake pads should be replaced as
complete sets.
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24
Vehicle Care
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
What to Add
Caution (Continued)
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-13.
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts
so badly that they will have to
be replaced. Do not let
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
someone put in the wrong
kind of fluid.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Warning
{
Warning
{
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
Battery
The original equipment battery is
maintenance free. Do not remove
the cap and do not add fluid.
Caution
{
.
Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5-21.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-25
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-5 for battery location.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Starter Switch Check
Warning
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Warning
{
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after
All-Wheel Drive
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
Transfer Case
Under normal driving conditions,
transfer case fluid does not require
changing or checking unless there
is a fluid leak or unusual noise.
If required, have the transfer case
serviced by your dealer.
handling.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Electric Parking Brake on
page 9-27.
Vehicle Storage
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
Warning
{
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10-75 for tips on working
around a battery without
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
getting hurt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Warning
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
.
To check the P (Park)
Warning
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
{
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Electric Parking Brake on
page 9-27.
It is a good idea to clean the wiper
blade assembly on a regular basis.
When worn, or when cleaning is
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-27
ineffective, replace the wiper blade.
For proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11-14.
Windshield Replacement
The windshield is part of the HUD
system. If the vehicle has to have
the windshield replaced, get one
that is designed for HUD or the
HUD image may look out of focus.
Caution
{
Allowing the wiper arm to touch
the windshield when no wiper
blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not allow
the wiper arm to touch the
windshield.
2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
of the wiper blade where the
wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Pull the wiper assembly away
from the windshield.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
blade replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28
Vehicle Care
LED Lighting
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
This vehicle has several LED lamps.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer.
Headlamp aim has been preset and
should need no further adjustment.
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10-29.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the headlamp aim may be affected.
If adjustment to the headlamps is
necessary, see your dealer.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Back-Up Lamps
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Warning
{
The high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very
high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured.
Have your dealer or a qualified
technician service them.
1. Back-Up Bulb Socket
2. Back-Up Lamp Assembly
To replace one of these bulbs:
After an HID headlamp bulb has
been replaced, the beam might be a
slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
1. Reach under the rear fascia and
locate the back-up lamp
assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-29
2. Remove the bulb socket (1) by
turning counterclockwise and
pulling straight out of the lamp
assembly (2).
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the bulb socket (1).
5. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install it into the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb in the bulb
socket.
6. Push the lamp assembly back
into position until the release tab
locks into place.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning
clockwise.
Replacement Bulbs
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Assembly
1. Bulb Socket
2. Bulb
3. Lamp Assembly
Bulb
Number
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
921
(W16W)
License Plate Lamp
W5W LL
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Push the lamp assembly (3)
toward the right.
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
2. Pull the lamp assembly down to
remove.
3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (3).
Lamp Assembly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30
Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
Electrical System
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
Windshield Wipers
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
To check a fuse, look at the
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
electrical problems.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10-31, Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10-34, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10-36.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-31
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,
squeeze the three retaining clips on
the cover and lift it straight up.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Rear Power
Caution
{
21
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Spilling liquid on any electrical
component on the vehicle may
damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical
component.
Windows
22
24
Sunroof
6
Wiper
Front Power
Windows
12
Starter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32
Vehicle Care
J-Case
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Fuses
3
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
13
Run/Crank for
Transmission
Control Module and
Chassis Control
Module
25
Retained Accessory
Power
4
5
Not Used
26
27
28
41
Antilock Brake
System Pump
Engine Control
Module Run/Crank
14
15
Right Rear
Heated Seat
Electric Parking
Brake
8
9
Ignition Coils – Even
(Six Cylinder
Engine)
Left Rear
Heated Seat
Rear Window
Defogger
Ignition Coils – Odd
(Six Cylinder
Engine)
16
17
18
Not Used
Brake Vacuum
Assist Pump
Body Run/Crank
42
44
45
Cooling Fan K2
Headlamp Washer
Cooling Fan K1
10
Engine Control
Module – Switched
Battery (from Engine
Control Module
Relay)
Autonet Run/Crank
(Aftermarket)
20
23
Not Used
Variable Effort
Steering
Mini Fuses
Usage
11
Six Cylinder Engine:
Post Catalytic
29
30
Passive Entry/
Passive Start
Module – Battery
1
Transmission
Control Module –
Battery
Converter Oxygen
Sensor Heater,
Mass Air Flow
Sensor, Flex Fuel
Sensor
All-Wheel Drive
Module
2
Engine Control
Module Battery
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-33
Mini Fuses
Usage
Left Front
Heated Seat
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
31
50
Left High Intensity
Discharge
64
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
Headlamp
Module – Battery
32
33
34
Body Control
Module 6
51
52
53
Horn
66
67
Trunk Release
Right Front
Heated Seat
Cluster Run/Crank
Chassis Control
Module
Run/Crank for Inside
Rearview Mirror,
Rear Vision Camera
Antilock Brake
System Valves
69
70
71
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
35
37
38
46
47
Amplifier
54
55
Run/Crank for
Heating, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
Vent Canister
Solenoid
Right High Beam
Left High Beam
Cooling Fan Relay
Memory Module
Outside Rearview
Mirror, Front Window
Switches
Mini Relays
Usage
Six Cylinder Engine:
Pre Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor Heater,
Canister Purge
Solenoid
7
Engine Control
Module
56
57
Windshield Washer
Steering
Column Lock
9
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
Run/Crank
13
15
17
60
62
Heated Mirror
48
49
Coolant Pump
Massage Memory
Bolster
Rear Window
Defogger
Right High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34
Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
Micro
Relays
Usage
1
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
2
4
Starter
Wiper Speed
Wiper Control
Not Used
5
8
10
11
14
Cooling Fan
Headlamp Washer
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Headlamp
Low Beam
Fuses
Usage
The instrument panel fuse block is
in the instrument panel, on the
driver side of the vehicle. To access
the fuses, open the fuse panel door
by pulling down at the top.
1
2
Telematics (OnStar)
Body Control
Module 7
3
4
Body Control
Module 5
Press in on the sides of the door to
release it from the instrument panel.
Radio
Pull the door toward you to release
it from the hinge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-35
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
5
Infotainment and
Center Stack
Displays, Head-up
Display, Instrument
Cluster, Rear Seat
Entertainment
12
Passenger Seat
(Circuit Breaker)
22
23
24
25
26
Steering Wheel
Controls/Backlight
13
14
Driver Seat (Circuit
Breaker)
Body Control
Module 3
Diagnostic Link
Connector
Body Control
Module 2
6
7
8
Power Outlet 1
Power Outlet 2
15
16
17
Airbag
Power Steering
Column
Glove Box
Body Control
Module 1
AC/DC Inverter
Heater Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Controller
9
Body Control
Module 4
Relays
R1
Usage
Glove Box
Logistics
18
19
Logistics
10
Body Control
Module 8
(J-Case Fuse)
R2
Electronic Steering
Column Lock
R3
Retained Accessory
Power/Accessory
20
21
Automatic Occupant
Sensing
11
Front Heater
Ventilation Air
Conditioning/Blower
(J-Case Fuse)
Spare
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36
Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
The rear compartment fuse block is
on the left side of the trunk behind a
cover.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuse
Number
Usage
Leveling
Compressor
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
F04
Fuse
Usage
Number
F05
F06
F07
F01
F02
F03
Not Used
Spare
Not Used
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-37
Fuse
Number
Usage
Fuse
Number
Usage
Fuse
Number
Usage
Not Used
F08
Front Courtesy
Lamps
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
Shunt
F34
Side Blind Zone
Not Used
F35
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
F36
All-Wheel Drive
Not Used
F37
Relays
K1
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
K2
Front Courtesy
Lamps Relay
Not Used
Not Used
K3
K4
Leveling
Compressor Relay
Not Used
Logic
Front Camera
Semi-active
Damping System
Rear Parking Assist/
Lane Departure
Warning
F19
Universal Garage
Door Opener/Rain,
Light, and Humidity
Sensor
F32
F33
Not Used
Not Used
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Warning (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
.
.
.
Tires
and a serious crash. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
Worn or old tires can
cause a crash. If the tread
is badly worn,
Every new GM vehicle has
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. See
the warranty manual for
information regarding the tire
warranty and where to get
service. For additional
replace them.
.
Underinflated tires pose
the same danger as
overloaded tires. The
resulting crash could
cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently
to maintain the
recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
are cold.
Replace any tires that
have been damaged by
impacts with potholes,
curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
Improperly repaired tires
can cause a crash. Only
the dealer or an
authorized tire service
center should repair,
replace, dismount, and
mount the tires.
Warning
{
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep
tires at the recommended
pressure.
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 56 km/h
(35 mph) on slippery
surfaces such as snow,
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
spinning may cause the
tires to explode.
.
Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
There could be a blowout
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-39
.
Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
traction or performance as winter
tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
See Winter Tires on page 10-39.
See Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation on
page 10-47 for inflation pressure
adjustment for high-speed
driving.
Winter Tires
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires with a lower speed rating are
chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
This vehicle was not originally
equipped with winter tires. Winter
tires are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice-covered
roads. Consider installing winter
tires on the vehicle if frequent
driving on ice or snow covered
roads is expected. See your dealer
for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 10-54.
All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
all-season tires. These tires are
designed to provide good overall
performance on most road surfaces
and weather conditions. Original
equipment tires designed to GM's
specific tire performance criteria
have a TPC specification code
molded onto the sidewall. Original
equipment all-season tires can be
identified by the last two characters
of this TPC code, which will
Summer Tires
This vehicle may come with high
performance summer tires. These
tires have a special tread and
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road
performance. This special tread and
compound will have decreased
performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend
installing winter tires on the vehicle
if frequent driving at temperatures
below approximately 5°C (40°F) or
on ice or snow covered roads is
expected. See Winter Tires on
page 10-39.
With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After changing to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
be “MS.”
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on
snow or ice-covered roads is
expected. All-season tires provide
adequate performance for most
winter driving conditions, but they
may not offer the same level of
If using winter tires:
.
Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40
Vehicle Care
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (01–52) and the last two digits,
section.
digits represent the week
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
the year. For example, the third
week of the year 2010 would
have a four-digit DOT date
of 0310.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
(4) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are the
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(3) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(5) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of
(6) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
Manufacture: The last four
digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two
grade tires based on three
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-41
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
(2) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire should not be driven at
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use when a regular
road tire has lost air and gone
flat. If the vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare
Tire on page 10-73 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 10-59.
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
Grading on page 10-56.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(5) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10-45.
(3) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
(6) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(7) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Compact Spare Tire Example
(1) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42
Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
exceed all federal safety
(6) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit
guidelines.
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
The following is an example of a
typical passenger vehicle
tire size.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item 3 of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch).
(4) Construction Code: A letter
code is used to indicate the type
of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply
construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply
construction.
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
Accessory Weight: The
combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-43
automatic transmission, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10-45.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing
materials.
passengers and cargo.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-44
Vehicle Care
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10-45 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-45
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/
16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10-53.
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10.
Caution
{
Neither tire underinflation nor
overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
that do not have enough air,
can result in:
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
.
Tire overloading and
overheating which could
lead to a blowout.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
.
Premature or
irregular wear.
.
Poor handling.
.
Reduced fuel economy.
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9-10.
Overinflated tires, or tires that
have too much air, can
result in:
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
page 10-56.
.
Unusual wear.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by
.
Poor handling.
.
Rough ride.
.
Needless damage from
road hazards.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-46
Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading
How to Check
Recheck the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Information label on the vehicle
indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The
recommended pressure is the
minimum air pressure needed to
support the vehicle's maximum
load carrying capacity. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
Proper tire inflation cannot be
Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks
determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
Check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold, meaning
Professional Vehicle
If the vehicle has P245/45R19 size
the vehicle has not been driven
tires, the cold inflation pressure is
for at least three hours or no
35 psi (241 kPa).
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
page 9-10.
If the vehicle has 235/55R18 size
Remove the valve cap from the
tires, the cold inflation pressure
How the vehicle is loaded
affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load the vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
tire valve stem. Press the tire
depends on the vehicle mass and
gauge firmly onto the valve to
should be determined by the vehicle
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until the recommended
pressure is reached. If the
coach-builder. A Tire and Loading
Information label provided by the
final stage manufacturer should be
attached to the B-pillar on the driver
side of the vehicle. If the final stage
manufacturer's label is not present,
contact the coach-builder. Do not
use the tire pressures indicated on
the General Motors label. These tire
pressures are for the incomplete
vehicle and are not the correct tire
pressures for the completed
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. If the vehicle has
a compact spare tire, it should
be at 420 kPa (60 psi). See
Compact Spare Tire on
inflation pressure is high, press
on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve to release air.
page 10-73 and Full-Size Spare
Tire on page 10-74.
professional vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-47
Vehicles with P245/45R19 98V size
tires require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving the vehicle
at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher. Set the cold inflation
Return the tires to the
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
recommended cold tire inflation
pressure when high-speed driving
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10 and Tire Pressure on
page 10-45.
Warning
{
pressure to 260 kPa (38 psi).
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Vehicles with P245/40R20 95V size
tires require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving the vehicle
at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher. Set the cold inflation
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat buildup
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high-speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
pressure to 270 kPa (39 psi).
Professional vehicles with 235/
55R18 104H size tires require
inflation pressure adjustment when
driving the vehicle at speeds of
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set
the cold inflation pressure to
40 kPa (6 psi) above the
recommended cold tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label for the 235/
55R18 104H size tires.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-48
Vehicle Care
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10-48.
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
under-inflated.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the tires and transmits the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-49
pressure levels can be viewed. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5-29.
The TPMS can warn about a low
tire pressure condition but it does
not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10-52, Tire Rotation on
page 10-52 and Tires on
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and
needs to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
page 10-38.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
on the instrument cluster. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10.
Caution
{
Tire sealant materials are not all
the same. A non-approved tire
sealant could damage the TPMS
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use only
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of the original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10-45.
A message to check the pressure in
a specific tire displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). The low
tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-50
Vehicle Care
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10-54.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10-61 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and DIC message should
go off after the road tire is
replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor
Matching Process” later in this
section.
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the tires. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process. See
"TPMS Sensor Matching
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message also
displays. The malfunction light and
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the problem
is corrected. Some of the conditions
that can cause these to come
on are:
If the TPMS is not functioning
properly it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
Process" later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the
TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
your dealer for service.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process
.
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-51
should also be performed after
replacing a spare tire with a road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off at the next
ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS
relearn tool can also be purchased.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
The TPMS sensor matching
process is:
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Place the vehicle power mode in
ON/RUN/START. See Ignition
Positions on page 9-15.
6. Start with the driver side
front tire.
3. Make sure the Tire Pressure info
display option is turned on. The
info displays on the DIC can be
turned on and off through the
Settings menu. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-29.
7. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
4. Use the five-way DIC control on
the right side of the steering
wheel to scroll to the Tire
Pressure screen under the DIC
info page. See Driver
Sensor Activation Tool at
www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or
call 1-800-GM TOOLS
(1-800-468-6657).
8. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat Step 7.
9. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat Step 7.
There are two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-29.
10. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat Step 7. The
horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor
5. Press and hold the SEL button
in the center of the five-way DIC
control.
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-52
Vehicle Care
.
The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Anytime unusual wear is
noticed, rotate the tires as soon
as possible, check for proper tire
inflation pressure, and check for
damaged tires or wheels. If the
unusual wear continues after the
rotation, check the wheel
alignment. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 10-53
and Wheel Replacement on
page 10-58.
11. Shut the ignition off.
.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
12. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-4.
Replace the tire if:
.
The indicators at three or
more places around the tire
can be seen.
Tires are rotated to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires. The
first rotation is the most
important.
.
There is cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
Use this rotation pattern when
rotating the tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-53
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Warning
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
Adjust the front and rear tires to
the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated. See
Tire Pressure on page 10-45
and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
Factors such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds,
vehicle loading, and road conditions
affect the wear rate of the tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10-48.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
Check that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on
Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10-52 and Tire
Rotation on page 10-52.
page 12-2.
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-54
Vehicle Care
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies to the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple factors
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
equipped, be replaced after six
years, regardless of tread wear. The
tire manufacture date is the last four
digits of the DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN) which is molded into
one side of the tire sidewall. The
first two digits represent the week
(01–52) and the last two digits, the
year. For example, the third week of
the year 2010 would have a
slow aging. This area should be free
of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of the
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
Parking for an extended period can
cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall
Labeling on page 10-40.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
GM recommends replacing worn
tires in complete sets of four.
Uniform tread depth on all tires
will help to maintain the
performance of the vehicle.
Braking and handling
performance may be adversely
affected if all the tires are not
replaced at the same time.
If proper rotation and
four-digit DOT date of 0310.
Vehicle Storage
system rating. When
replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends
buying tires with the same TPC
Spec rating.
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-55
maintenance have been done,
all four tires should wear out at
about the same time. See Tire
Rotation on page 10-52.
However, if it is necessary to
replace only one axle set of
worn tires, place the new tires
on the rear axle.
Warning (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Only your dealer or authorized
tire service center should
mount or dismount the tires.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating, and
construction (radial) as the
original tires.
Warning
{
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment
tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated
tires. Never exceed the winter
tires’ maximum speed capability
when using winter tires with a
lower speed rating.
Mixing tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may cause
loss of control of the vehicle,
resulting in a crash or other
vehicle damage. Use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
Warning
{
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10-47.
Warning
{
Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting
to mount or dismount a tire
could cause injury or death.
Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-56
Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading
treadwear, traction, and
Warning
{
Information label indicates the
original equipment tires on the
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
If different sized wheels are used,
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. This
increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, electronic stability control,
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
of these systems can also be
affected.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10-54 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10-3.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-57
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example:
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and
differences in road
Temperature
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Traction
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
one-half (1½) times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-58
Vehicle Care
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Warning
{
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
and cause loss of control, causing
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel that is needed.
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
are not necessary on a regular
basis. Consider an alignment check
if there is unusual tire wear or the
vehicle is significantly pulling to one
side or the other. Some slight pull to
the left or right, depending on the
crown of the road and/or other road
surface variations such as troughs
or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is
vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels may need
to be rebalanced. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Caution
{
The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake
cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp
aim, bumper height, vehicle
ground clearance, and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-59
Professional vehicle wheels have a
unique offset and bolt hole diameter.
Professional vehicle wheels have
six wheel nuts. Non-professional
vehicle wheels have five wheel nuts.
See Tire Changing on page 10-69.
Tire Chains
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
while driving, especially if the tires
are maintained properly. See Tires
on page 10-38. If air goes out of a
tire, it is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if there is ever a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
Warning
{
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause loss of
control and a crash.
Used Replacement Wheels
Warning
{
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for the vehicle's
tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow
and readjust or remove the
traction device if it contacts the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the front tires.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the
accelerator pedal and steer to
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-60
Vehicle Care
Warning
Warning
Warning
{
{
{
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has been
driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall
causing injury or death. Find a
level place to change the tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6-5.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks,
if equipped, on both sides of
the tire at the opposite
corner of the tire being
changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-61
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
page 10-69. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10-61.
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
Warning
{
Overinflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
Warning
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (1), if equipped.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9-22.
Warning
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)
2. Flat Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-62
Vehicle Care
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire or tire changing
equipment, and on some vehicles
there may not be a place to store
a tire.
The kit includes:
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air
or Air Only)
2. On/Off Button
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Pressure Deflation Button
5. Tire Sealant Canister
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
7. Air Only Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an
9. Canister Release Button
(Under Sealant/Air Hose)
underinflated tire.
Tire Sealant
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service on
page 13-5.
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister. The
sealant canister should be replaced
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-63
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Pressure Deflation Button
5. Tire Sealant Canister
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
7. Air Only Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
9. Canister Release Button
(Under Sealant/Air Hose)
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6-5.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10-59 for other important
safety warnings.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air
or Air Only)
2. On/Off Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-64
Vehicle Care
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10-68.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)
and the power plug (8).
pressure using the pressure
gauge (3). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10-45.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
8. Press and turn the selector
switch (1) counterclockwise to
the Sealant + Air position.
The pressure gauge (3) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
9. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
correct pressure is reached.
6. Plug the power plug (8) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5-6.
The pressure gauge (3) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
Caution
{
If the recommended pressure
cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-65
12. Unplug the power plug (8) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
Caution (Continued)
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service on page 13-5.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1–11 under “Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a
Tire (Not Punctured).”
15. Replace the sealant/air hose
(6), and the power plug (8)
back in their original location.
11. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on
page 13-5.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12–18 must be
done immediately after
Step 11.
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (5) and place it
in a highly visible location. Do
not exceed the speed on this
label until the damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-66
Vehicle Care
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Pressure Deflation Button
5. Tire Sealant Canister
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
7. Air Only Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (5) and sealant/air
hose (6) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
9. Canister Release Button
(Under Sealant/Air Hose)
22. Replace with a new canister
assembly available from your
dealer.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
23. After temporarily sealing the
tire using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
Warning Flashers on page 6-5.
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 mi) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10-59 for other important
safety warnings.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10-68.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
2. Unwrap the air only hose (7) and
the power plug (8).
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air
or Air Only)
2. On/Off Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-67
3. Place the kit on the ground.
8. Press and turn the selector
switch (1) clockwise to the Air
Only position.
excess pressure by pressing
the pressure deflation
button (4) until the proper
pressure reading is reached.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
hose (7).
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
9. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the compressor on.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
11. Press the on/off button (2) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
5. Attach the air only hose (7) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (3). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10-45.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
6. Plug the power plug (8) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5-6.
12. Unplug the power plug (8) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
The pressure gauge (3) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading. The
compressor may be turned on/
off until the correct pressure is
reached.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
13. Disconnect the air only hose
(7) from the tire valve stem, by
turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
14. Replace the air only hose (7)
and the power plug (8) and
cord back in its original
location.
If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-68
Vehicle Care
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
2. Press the canister release
button (9).
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
3. Turn the wing nut
5. Push the new canister into
place.
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and
compressor kit:
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2-15.
2. Lift the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-69
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-59.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
3. Turn the retainer nut
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire. Place the spare
tire next to the tire being
changed.
1. Jack
2. Wrench
3. Tow Hook (If Equipped)
4. Fastener Rod
4. The jack and tools are stored
below the spare tire. Remove
them from their container and
place them near the tire being
changed.
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the trunk.
3. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
If this is a professional vehicle, see
the Coachbuilder’s Owner Manual
for information on the spare tire and
tools storage and location.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
4. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-70
Vehicle Care
5. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
Warning
Caution
{
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
Make sure that the jack lift head
is in the correct position or you
may damage your vehicle. The
repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
Warning
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
Warning
{
6. Place the hex tube end of the
wrench over the hex head of
the jack.
Raising the vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
7. Place the jack under the vehicle.
8. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire,
as shown. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-71
Warning (Continued)
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room
for the road tire to clear the
ground.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
11. Remove the flat tire.
Warning
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-72
Vehicle Care
Warning
Warning (Continued)
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12-2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
Caution
{
15. Lower the vehicle by turning
the jack handle
Improperly tightened wheel nuts
can lead to brake pulsation and
rotor damage. To avoid expensive
brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper
counterclockwise.
Warning
{
sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12-2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-73
17. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
To store the compact spare tire, use
the shorter mounting bolt.
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Compact Spare Tire
Warning
{
Warning
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
1. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to remove the
fastener rod.
2. Replace the fastener rod with
the one provided in the foam.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise to
tighten the fastener rod.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire, it was fully inflated when new;
however, it can lose air over time.
Check the inflation pressure
regularly. It should be 420 kPa
(60 psi).
4. Replace the foam, jack and
tools, and the tire.
5. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
to secure the tire.
6. Place the floor cover on the
wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-74
Vehicle Care
Stop as soon as possible and check
that the spare tire is correctly
Full-Size Spare Tire
Caution
{
If this vehicle came with a full-size
spare tire, it was fully inflated when
new, however, it can lose air over
time. Check the inflation pressure
regularly. See Tire Pressure on
page 10-45 and Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10 for information
regarding proper tire inflation and
loading the vehicle. For instructions
on how to remove, install, or store a
spare tire, see Tire Changing on
page 10-69.
inflated after being installed on the
vehicle. The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of
the spare tire, have the standard tire
repaired or replaced as soon as
convenient and return the spare tire
to the storage area.
When the compact spare is
installed, do not take the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails
which can damage the tire, wheel,
and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
After installing the spare tire on the
vehicle, stop as soon as possible
and check that the spare is correctly
inflated. The spare tire is made to
perform well at speeds up to
112 km/h (70 mph) at the
recommended inflation pressure, so
you can finish your trip.
When using a compact spare tire,
the ABS and Traction Control
systems may engage until the spare
tire is recognized by the vehicle,
especially on slippery roads. Adjust
driving to reduce possible
Caution
{
wheel slip.
Tire chains will not fit the compact
spare. Using them can damage
the vehicle and the chains. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-75
Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced and installed
back onto the vehicle as soon as
possible so the spare tire will be
available in case it is needed again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of
different sizes, because they will not
fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel
together.
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10-24.
Warning
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
If the battery has run down, try to
use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
Warning
{
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after
Caution
{
handling.
Ignoring these steps could result
in costly damage to the vehicle
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Trying to start
the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-76
Vehicle Care
The vehicle has a battery cover
which must be removed to gain
access to the battery for jump
starting.
3. Reverse Steps 1–2 to reinstall
the battery cover.
The vehicle has a remote negative
(−) ground location. It is located on
the driver side of the engine
compartment. See Engine
The vehicle has a remote
Compartment Overview on
positive (+) terminal under a trim
cover. It is under the battery cover
on the driver side of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10-5. Always use this remote
positive terminal.
page 10-5. Always use this remote
ground location, instead of the
terminal on the battery.
1. Clips
2. Pivot Points
To remove the battery cover:
1. Release the two rear clips (1).
2. Lift the battery cover up toward
the front of the vehicle to release
it from the pivot points (2) and
remove.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-77
These posts are used instead of a
direct connection to the battery.
Caution
Warning
{
{
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
If any accessories are left on or
plugged in during the jump
starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Whenever possible, turn
off or unplug all accessories on
either vehicle when jump starting.
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Caution
{
If the other vehicle does not have
a 12-volt system with a negative
ground, both vehicles can be
damaged. Only use a vehicle that
has a 12-volt system with a
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
4. Turn the ignition to OFF and
switch off all lights and
negative ground for jump starting.
accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
flashers if needed.
2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
Warning
{
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission should be in
P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
on page 9-20.
Warning
{
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-78
Vehicle Care
5. Connect one end of the red
positive (+) cable to the jump
start remote positive (+) terminal
for the discharged battery.
Towing the Vehicle
Caution
{
If the jumper cables are
Caution
{
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other
metal.
6. Connect the other end of the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery.
Incorrectly towing a disabled
vehicle may cause damage. The
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
7. Connect one end of the black
negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) terminal of the good
battery.
Have the vehicle towed on a wheel
lift tow truck. A flatbed car carrier
could damage the vehicle. The
wheel lift tow truck must raise the
rear of the vehicle and wheel dollies
must be used to lift the front wheels
off the ground.
8. Connect the other end of the
black negative (–) cable to the
remote negative (–) post for the
discharged battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when
removing the jumper cables.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home. The
two most common types of
10. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-79
.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Dinghy Towing
Caution
{
Use of a shield mounted in front
of the vehicle grille could restrict
airflow and cause damage to the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If using a shield, only
use one that attaches to the
towing vehicle.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
Caution
{
recommendations.
.
If the vehicle is towed with all four
wheels on the ground, the
drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not tow the vehicle
with all four wheels on the
ground.
What is the distance that will be
traveled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-80
Vehicle Care
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used. See
the following information on dolly
towing.
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow the vehicle from the front:
Dolly Towing from the Front
(All-Wheel Drive)
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
Dolly Towing from the Front
(Front-Wheel Drive)
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight-ahead
position.
Vehicles with all-wheel drive cannot
be dolly towed.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer
instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Vehicles with front-wheel drive can
be dolly towed from the front.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-81
Dolly Towing from the Rear
Appearance Care
Caution (Continued)
products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all
manufacturer directions regarding
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions, and
Exterior Care
Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory.
Use a de-icing agent only when
absolutely necessary, and have the
locks greased after using. See
Recommended Fluids and
appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Lubricants on page 11-13.
Washing the Vehicle
Caution
{
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct
sunlight.
Avoid using high-pressure
washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use
of power washers exceeding
8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result
in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed
from the rear.
Caution
{
Do not use petroleum-based,
acidic, or abrasive cleaning
agents as they can damage the
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic
parts. If damage occurs, it would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Approved cleaning
The e symbol is on any
underhood compartment electrical
center that should not be power
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-82
Vehicle Care
washed. This could cause damage
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Caution (Continued)
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
If using an automatic car wash,
follow the car wash instructions. The
windshield wiper and rear window
wiper, if equipped, must be off.
Remove any accessories that may
be damaged or interfere with the car
wash equipment.
To keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove
residue from the paint finish. See
your dealer for approved cleaning
products.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Moldings
Caution
{
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
as damage can occur.
Failure to clean and protect the
bright metal moldings can result
in a hazy white finish or pitting.
This damage would not be
Finish Care
Caution
covered by the vehicle warranty.
{
Application of aftermarket clearcoat
sealant/wax materials is not
recommended. If painted surfaces
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and
repaired. Foreign materials such as
Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-83
.
Aftermarket appearance caps or
covers while the lamps are
illuminated, due to excessive
heat generated.
The bright metal moldings on the
vehicle are aluminum or stainless
steel. To prevent damage always
follow these cleaning instructions:
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses, Emblems, Decals and
Stripes
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses,
emblems, decals and stripes. Follow
instructions under "Washing the
Vehicle" previously in this section.
.
Be sure the molding is cool to
the touch before applying any
cleaning solution.
Caution
{
Failure to clean lamps properly
can cause damage to the lamp
cover that would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
.
Use a cleaning solution
approved for aluminum or
stainless steel. Some cleaners
are highly acidic or contain
alkaline substances and can
damage the moldings.
Lamp covers are made of plastic,
and some have a UV protective
coating. Do not clean or wipe them
when dry.
Caution
{
.
Always dilute a concentrated
cleaner according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not use any of the following on
lamp covers:
Using wax on low gloss black
finish stripes can increase the
gloss level and create a
non-uniform finish. Clean low
gloss stripes with soap and
water only.
.
Abrasive or caustic agents.
.
Do not use chrome cleaners.
.
Washer fluids and other cleaning
.
Do not use cleaners that are not
intended for automotive use.
agents in higher concentrations
than suggested by the
manufacturer.
.
Use a nonabrasive wax on the
vehicle after washing to protect
and extend the molding finish.
.
Solvents, alcohols, fuels,
or other harsh cleaners.
Air Intakes
Clear debris from the air intakes,
between the hood and windshield
when washing the vehicle.
.
Ice scrapers or other hard items.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-84
Vehicle Care
can be removed by rubbing with a
clean cloth. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-13.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Caution
{
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Chrome wheels and other chrome
trim may be damaged if the
vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed
with magnesium, calcium,
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Caution
{
Using petroleum-based tire
dressing products on the vehicle
may damage the paint finish and/
or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any
overspray from all painted
Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
snow, and ice.
Caution
{
surfaces on the vehicle.
To avoid surface damage, do not
use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners,
brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. Use only
approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an
Weatherstrips
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at
least once a year. Hot, dry climates
may require more frequent
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
soap and water to clean the wheels.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean
water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
application. Black marks from
rubber material on painted surfaces
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-85
underbody. Take care to thoroughly
clean any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
Steering, Suspension, and
Chassis Components
Caution (Continued)
automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. Damage could occur
and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Visually inspect steering,
suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
or missing parts or signs of wear at
least once a year.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Inspect power steering for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
Brake System
Visually inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect drum
brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts,
including drums, wheel cylinders,
calipers, parking brake, master
cylinder, brake fluid reservoir,
vacuum pipes, electric vacuum
pump including bracket and vent
hose, if equipped.
Visually check constant velocity joint
boots and axle seals for leaks.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel
fuel door hinge, unless the
components are plastic. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and
scratches with touch-up materials
available from your dealer to avoid
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
damage can be corrected in your
dealer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall
use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-86
Vehicle Care
.
.
Never use a brush with stiff
bristles.
Your dealer may have products for
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
specifically designed for the
surfaces being cleaned to prevent
permanent damage. Apply all
cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
on any switches or controls.
Cleaners should be removed
quickly. Never allow cleaners to
remain on the surface being
cleaned for extended periods
of time.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface. See “Finish Care”
Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive
pressure.
.
Do not use laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
use approximately 20 drops per
3.8 L (1 gal) of water.
A concentrated soap solution will
leave a residue that creates
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap.
previously in this section.
Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Immediately remove any soils. Note
that newspapers or dark garments
that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently
transfer color to the vehicle's
interior.
Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery when cleaning.
Do not use solvents or cleaners
containing solvents.
ventilation by opening the doors and
windows.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove
dust from knobs and crevices on the
instrument cluster. Using a mild
soap solution, immediately remove
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
repellent from all interior surfaces or
permanent damage may result.
Interior Glass
To prevent damage, do not clean
the interior using the following
cleaners or techniques:
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
left behind with a clean dry cloth.
Commercial glass cleaners may be
used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water.
.
Never use a razor or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-87
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
a clean area frequently to
prevent forcing the soil in to the
fabric.
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Caution
{
Start by vacuuming the surface
using a soft brush attachment. If a
rotating brush attachment is being
used during vacuuming, only use it
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the
To prevent scratching, never use
abrasive cleaners on automotive
glass. Abrasive cleaners or
aggressive cleaning may damage
the rear window defogger.
4. Continue gently rubbing the
soiled area until there is no
longer any color transfer from
the soil to the cleaning cloth.
following techniques:
Cleaning the windshield with water
during the first three to six months
of ownership will reduce tendency
to fog.
.
Gently blot liquids with a paper
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution followed only by plain
water.
towel. Continue blotting until no
more soil can be removed.
.
For solid soils, remove as much
Speaker Covers
as possible prior to vacuuming.
If the soil is not completely
removed, it may be necessary to
use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet.
Vacuum around a speaker cover
gently, so that the speaker will not
be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean lint-free
colorfast cloth with water.
Microfiber cloth is recommended
to prevent lint transfer to the
fabric or carpet.
Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
.
When lightly soiled, wipe with a
sponge or soft lint-free cloth
dampened with water.
Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
.
When heavily soiled, use warm
soapy water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-88
Vehicle Care
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
and Vehicle Information and
Radio Displays
Instrument Panel, Leather,
Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,
Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and
Natural Open Pore Wood
Surfaces
Caution (Continued)
solvents can permanently change
the appearance and feel of
leather or soft trim, and are not
recommended.
For vehicles with high gloss
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
Before wiping the surface with the
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
brush to remove dirt that could
scratch the surface. Then use the
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
clean. Never use window cleaners
or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately,
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
and air dry before next use.
Use a soft microfiber cloth
dampened with water to remove
dust and loose dirt. For a more
thorough cleaning, use a soft
microfiber cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution.
Do not use cleaners that increase
gloss, especially on the instrument
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Caution
{
Caution
{
Soaking or saturating leather,
especially perforated leather, as
well as other interior surfaces,
may cause permanent damage.
Wipe excess moisture from these
surfaces after cleaning and allow
them to dry naturally. Never use
heat, steam, or spot removers. Do
not use cleaners that contain
silicone or wax-based products.
Cleaners containing these
Use of air fresheners may cause
permanent damage to plastics
and painted surfaces. If an air
freshener comes in contact with
any plastic or painted surface in
the vehicle, blot immediately and
clean with a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution.
Caution
{
Do not attach a device with a
suction cup to the display. This
may cause damage and would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Damage caused by air fresheners
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-89
.
.
Do not use a floor mat if the
vehicle is not equipped with a
floor mat retainer on the driver
side floor.
Cargo Cover and
Convenience Net
Floor Mats
Warning
Wash with warm water and mild
detergent. Do not use chlorine
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
then dry completely.
{
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the pedals.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
Care of Safety Belts
.
.
.
Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
Warning
{
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by button-type retainers.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
.
The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-90
Vehicle Care
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock the retainers and
remove.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer openings over the
carpet retainers and snap into
position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-1
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
General Information
Your vehicle is an important
Service and
Maintenance
investment. This section describes
the required maintenance for the
vehicle. Follow this schedule to help
protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
responsibility of the owner to have
all required maintenance performed.
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-4
Your dealer has trained technicians
who can perform required
Special Application Services
Special Application
maintenance using genuine
replacement parts. They have
up-to-date tools and equipment for
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
dealers have extended evening and
Saturday hours, courtesy
transportation, and online
scheduling to assist with service
needs.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Additional Maintenance
and Care
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
Your dealer recognizes the
importance of providing
The Tire Rotation and Required
Services are the responsibility of the
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services - Normal chart.
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
technicians, the dealer is the place
for routine maintenance such as oil
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
blades.
The Additional Required Services -
Severe are for vehicles that are:
.
Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
in hot weather.
.
Mainly driven in hilly or
mountainous terrain.
Because of the way people use
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
There may need to be more
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services -
Normal are for vehicles that:
.
Frequently towing a trailer.
Caution
{
.
Used for high speed or
Damage caused by improper
maintenance can lead to costly
repairs and may not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, recommended fluids,
and lubricants are important to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition.
competitive driving.
.
Used for taxi, police, or delivery
service.
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services - Severe chart.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
.
Use the recommended fuel. See
Fuel on page 9-59.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-3
.
Engine air cleaner filter
Cadillac Premium
Care Maintenance
Your vehicle comes with the
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance. It is a maintenance
program that covers select
maintenance services during the
first 4 years or 80 000 km
replacement.
Warning
{
.
Passenger compartment air filter
replacement.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous and can cause
serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if the
required information, proper tools,
and equipment are available.
If they are not, see your dealer to
have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10-3.
.
Multi‐point vehicle inspection
(MPVI) performed by a qualified
technician.
Cadillac requires that all Cadillac
Premium Care Maintenance
services be performed by a Cadillac
authorized service dealer.
(50,000 mi), whichever comes first.
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance covers routine
maintenance services, when
scheduled in accordance with the
owner manual, including:
.
Oil changes based on the
vehicle's oil life monitor system.
.
Tire rotation every 12 000 km
(7,500 mi).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
Engine Oil Change
Tire Rotation and Required
Services Every 12 000 km/
7,500 mi
Maintenance
Schedule
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, have the
engine oil and filter changed within
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not
indicate the need for vehicle service
for up to a year. The engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once
a year and the oil life system must
be reset. Your trained dealer
technician can perform this work.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the
last service. Reset the oil life
Owner Checks and Services
Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the vehicle, and perform the
following services. See Tire
Rotation on page 10-52.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Check the engine oil level. See
Engine Oil on page 10-9.
.
Check engine oil level and oil
life percentage. If needed,
Once a Month
change engine oil and filter, and
reset oil life system. See Engine
Oil on page 10-9 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 10-11.
.
Check the tire inflation
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
page 10-45.
.
Inspect the tires for wear. See
.
Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 10-52.
Engine Coolant on page 10-16.
.
Check the windshield washer
.
Check windshield washer fluid
system when the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10-11.
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10-22.
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10-22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-5
.
.
.
Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10-81. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10-26.
Check restraint system
components. See Safety System
Check on page 3-23.
Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
.
.
.
Visually inspect fuel system for
damage or leaks.
Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
Visually inspect exhaust system
and nearby heat shields for
loose or damaged parts.
.
.
Check tire inflation pressures.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10-45.
.
.
Check tire sealant expiration
date, if equipped. See Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10-61.
.
.
.
Lubricate body components. See
Exterior Care on page 10-81.
Inspect tire wear. See Tire
Inspection on page 10-52.
Check starter switch. See Starter
Switch Check on page 10-25.
.
.
Visually check for fluid leaks.
Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2-26.
Check automatic transmission
shift lock control function. See
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check on
page 10-26.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10-13.
.
.
Inspect brake system. See
Exterior Care on page 10-81.
.
Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10-26.
Visually inspect steering,
suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
or missing parts or signs of
wear. See Exterior Care on
page 10-81.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Inspect evaporative control system. (2)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace spark plugs. Inspect ignition coils.
(3.6L LFX)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect ignition coils.
(3.6L LF3)
@
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5)
Replace brake fluid. (6)
@
@
@
@
@
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services - Normal
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(6) Or every three years, whichever
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-14.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Inspect evaporative control system. (2)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Replace spark plugs. Inspect ignition coils.
(3.6L LFX)
@
Replace spark plugs. Inspect ignition coils.
(3.6L LF3)
@
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5)
Replace brake fluid. (6)
@
@
@
@
@
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services - Severe
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
Special Application
Services
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-14.
.
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
Severe Commercial Use
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
components every 5 000 km/
3,000 mi.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
.
Have underbody flushing service
performed. See "Underbody
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
on page 10-81.
(6) Or every three years, whichever
comes first.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
The following list is intended to
explain the services and conditions
to look for that may indicate
services are required.
Belts
Additional
Maintenance and Care
Your vehicle is an important
investment and caring for it properly
may help to avoid future costly
repairs. To maintain vehicle
performance, additional
.
Belts may need replacing if they
squeak or show signs of
cracking or splitting.
Battery
.
Trained dealer technicians have
access to tools and equipment
to inspect the belts and
The battery supplies power to start
the engine and operate any
additional electrical accessories.
recommend adjustment or
replacement when necessary.
maintenance services may be
required.
.
To avoid break-down or failure to
start the vehicle, maintain a
battery with full cranking power.
Brakes
It is recommended that your dealer
perform these services — their
trained dealer technicians know
your vehicle best. Your dealer can
also perform a thorough
assessment with a multi-point
inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
Brakes stop the vehicle and are
crucial to safe driving.
.
Trained dealer technicians have
the diagnostic equipment to test
the battery and ensure that the
connections and cables are
corrosion-free.
.
Signs of brake wear may include
chirping, grinding, or squealing
noises, or difficulty stopping.
.
Trained dealer technicians have
access to tools and equipment
to inspect the brakes and
recommend quality parts
engineered for the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-11
.
As part of the multi-point
inspection, trained dealer
Fluids
Lamps
Proper fluid levels and approved
fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
and components. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-13 for GM
approved fluids.
Properly working headlamps,
taillamps, and brake lamps are
important to see and be seen on
the road.
technicians can visually inspect
the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals,
or damage, and can advise
when service is needed.
.
Signs that the headlamps need
attention include dimming, failure
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be
checked periodically to ensure
that they light when braking.
Tires
.
Engine oil and windshield
Tires need to be properly inflated,
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
the tires can save money and fuel,
and can reduce the risk of tire
failure.
washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.
.
Instrument cluster lights may
.
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
With a multi-point inspection,
your dealer can check the lamps
and note any concerns.
.
Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
rubber; cracks or cuts in the
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
split in the tire.
Hoses
Shocks and Struts
Hoses transport fluids and should
be regularly inspected to ensure
that there are no cracks or leaks.
With a multi-point inspection, your
dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.
Shocks and struts help aid in control
for a smoother ride.
.
Signs of wear may include
steering wheel vibration, bounce/
sway while braking, longer
stopping distance, or uneven
tire wear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
.
.
Trained dealer technicians can
Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
Wheel Alignment
inspect and recommend the right
tires. Your dealer can also
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.
Wheel alignment is critical for
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
Wiper Blades
.
Signs that the alignment may
Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
provide a clear view.
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
handling, or unusual tire wear.
Vehicle Care
.
.
Signs of wear include streaking,
skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
Your dealer has the required
To help keep the vehicle looking like
new, vehicle care products are
available from your dealer. For
information on how to clean and
protect the vehicle’s interior and
exterior, see Interior Care on
page 10-86 and Exterior Care on
page 10-81.
equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.
.
Trained dealer technicians can
check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
.
Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-13
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approved
engine oil. See Engine Oil on page 10-9.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-16.
Hydraulic Brake System
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Hydraulic Power Steering System
Windshield Washer
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive)
Chassis Lubrication
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 19256084, in Canada 19256085).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Key Lock Cylinders, Hood, and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-14
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.6L (LF3)
22989313
20972655
A3176C
A3175C
3.6L (LFX)
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L (LF3)
89017525
89017525
22743911
PF63
PF63
3.6L (LFX)
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
CF183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-15
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Spark Plugs
3.6L (LF3)
12642791
12622561
41-118
41-109
3.6L (LFX)
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65 cm (25.6 in)
25892079
25882578
—
—
Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-16
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the load floor under
the spare tire cover in the trunk, has
the following information:
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.
Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Paint information.
.
Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
3.6L (LF3)
9.8 L
7.1 L
10.4 qt
7.5 qt
3.6L (LFX)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L (LF3)
6.6 L
5.7 L
7.0 qt
6.0 qt
3.6L (LFX)
Fuel Tank
Front-Wheel Drive
All-Wheel Drive
Wheel Nut Torque
70.0 L
74.0 L
18.5 gal
19.5 gal
110 lb ft
150 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-3
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Engine
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine (LF3)
8
0.75–0.90 mm
(0.030–.035 in)
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX)
3
0.95–1.10 mm
(0.037–.043 in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8
Service Publications
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner of
your dealership or the general
manager.
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-10
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-11
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by your dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800–458–8006. In
Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac
Customer Care Centre at
When contacting Cadillac,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with the new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
1-888-446-2000.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
.
Vehicle Identification
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer Care
Centre, 1-888-446-2000 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
Customer Assistance
Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
the letter should be addressed to:
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
or write to:
mediation/arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Care Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States and Puerto Rico
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
The inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Customer Information
communicate with Cadillac by
dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Canada
D (Preferred Dealer
Information): Select a dealer and
view locations, maps, phone
numbers, and hours.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care
Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
J (Warranty Tracking
Information): Track the vehicle’s
warranty information.
Online Owner Experience
(U.S.) my.cadillac.com
1-888-446-2000 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112
J (Recall Information): View
active recalls or search by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
on page 12-1.
The Cadillac online owner
experience allows interaction with
Cadillac and keeps important
vehicle-specific information in one
place.
Overseas
Contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
H (Other Account Information):
View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
radio, and OnStar account
information.
Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information):
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
Download owner manuals and view
vehicle-specific how-to videos.
F (Live Chat Support): Chat with
G (Maintenance Information):
View maintenance schedules,
required alerts, and OnStar onboard
vehicle diagnostic information.
Schedule service appointments.
online help representatives.
See my.cadillac.com to register your
vehicle.
I (Service History): View
printable dealer-recorded service
records and self-recorded service
records.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-5
Roadside Service is not a part of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
General Motors North America and
Cadillac reserve the right to make
any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Service program at any
time without notification.
Cadillac Owner Centre
(Canada) cadillacowner.ca
Calling for Service
When calling Roadside Service,
have the following information
ready:
Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre:
.
Chat live with online help
.
Your name, home address, and
representatives.
home telephone number.
.
Locate owner resources such as
.
Telephone number of your
General Motors North America and
Cadillac reserve the right to limit
services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are
made too often, or the same type of
claim is made many times.
lease-end, financing, and
warranty information.
location.
.
.
Location of the vehicle.
Retrieve favorite articles,
quizzes, tips, and multimedia
galleries organized into the
Featured Articles and Auto Care
Sections.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
.
.
Download owner manuals.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
.
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Find Cadillac-recommended
maintenance services.
.
Description of the problem.
Coverage
.
Roadside Service
U.S.: 1-800-224-1400.
Canada: 1-800-882-1112.
Lock-Out Service: Service to
Services are provided up to 6 years/
110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichever
comes first.
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
Only): 1-888-889-2438.
before this service is given.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Customer Information
.
.
.
Emergency Tow from a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is not given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Legal fines.
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. Only)
Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club or
towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting a
Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.
Service is not provided if a vehicle
is in an area that is not accessible
to the service vehicle or is not a
regularly traveled or maintained
public road, which includes ice and
winter roads. Off-road use is not
covered.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with a spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is your
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30-mile radius
of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
Services Specific to
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel
delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service: If your trip is
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the
6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi)
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Services Not Included in
Roadside Service
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-7
Service advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
extended powertrain, and/or
hybrid-specific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
.
Alternative Service: If
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside Service
advisor may give you permission
to get local emergency road
service. You will receive
payment, up to $100, after
sending the original receipt to
Roadside Service. Mechanical
failures may be covered,
however any cost for parts and
labor for repairs not covered by
the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Limited Warranty and
Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for
same-day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to do so, your
dealer may offer the following
transportation options:
Courtesy Transportation
Program
Scheduling Service
Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty
service, contact your dealer and
request an appointment. By
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
Shuttle Service
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
This includes one-way or round-trip
shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of
your dealer's area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8
Customer Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
Additional fees such as fuel usage
charges, taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair
are also your responsibility.
If overnight warranty repairs are
needed, and public transportation is
used, the expense must be
supported by original receipts and
within the maximum amount allowed
by GM for shuttle service. If U.S.
customers arrange their own
transportation, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original
receipts. See your dealer for
information.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program
Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Contact your dealer
for specific availability.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
For an overnight warranty repair, the
dealer may provide an available
courtesy rental vehicle or provide for
reimbursement of a rental vehicle.
Reimbursement is limited and must
be supported by original receipts as
well as a signed and completed
rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements.
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-9
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring the Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for the vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10
Customer Information
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3-30.
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Service on page 13-5.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Gather the following information:
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
.
Driver name, address, and
telephone number.
.
Driver license number.
.
Owner name, address, and
telephone number.
.
Vehicle license plate number.
.
Vehicle make, model, and
model year.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
.
.
.
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Service Manuals
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
Insurance company and policy
number.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-11
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.
Current and Past Models
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The
Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Manual.
personal information.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –
$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12
Customer Information
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-GEN/210/220/310, ICES‐001.
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
1. The device may not cause
harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
http://www.safercar.gov
.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-13
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Transport Canada at
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors.
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
The vehicle has a number of
computers that record information
about the vehicle’s performance and
how it is driven. For example, the
vehicle uses computer modules to
monitor and control engine and
transmission performance, to
monitor the conditions for airbag
deployment and deploy them in a
crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver
control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help the dealer
technician service the vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how the vehicle is operated,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit , MI 48232-5169
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
80 rue Noel
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,
or write:
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care
Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa , Ontario L1H 8P7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14
Customer Information
These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety
circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
OnStar®
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
If the vehicle is equipped with
OnStar® and has an active
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
.
How various systems in your
subscription, additional data may be
collected through the OnStar
system. This includes information
about the vehicle’s operation;
collisions involving the vehicle; the
use of the vehicle and its features;
and, in certain situations, the
location and approximate GPS
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
vehicle were operating;
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
.
How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/
or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-15
OnStar Terms and Conditions and
Privacy Statement on the OnStar
website.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system as part of the
infotainment system, use of the
system may result in the storage of
destinations, addresses, telephone
numbers, and other trip information.
See the infotainment manual for
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16
Customer Information
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-1
providers. OnStar may collect
information about you and your
vehicle, including location
OnStar Overview
OnStar
information. See OnStar’s Terms
and Conditions and Privacy
Statement for more details
including system limitations at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
OnStar Overview
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
= Voice Command Button
Q Blue OnStar Button
> Emergency Button
The OnStar system status light is
next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:
.
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional
Solid Green: System is on.
This vehicle may be equipped with a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
Navigation, Connection, and
.
Flashing Green: On a call.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
.
Red: Indicates a problem.
.
Off: System is off. Press Q
twice to speak with an OnStar
Advisor.
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
services may require a paid
subscription. OnStar requires the
vehicle battery and electrical
system, cellular service, and GPS
satellite signals to be available and
operating. OnStar acts as a link to
existing public emergency service
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-2
OnStar
.
Receive On-Demand
Press = to:
OnStar Services
Diagnostics for a check of the
vehicle’s key operating systems.
.
Make a call, end a call,
Emergency
With Automatic Crash Response,
the OnStar system can
automatically connect to an OnStar
Emergency Advisor. The built-in
system can automatically connect to
help in certain crashes.
or answer an incoming call.
.
.
Receive Roadside Assistance.
.
.
Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
Manage WiFi Settings (if
equipped).
Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation voice commands.
Requires a specific OnStar
subscription plan.
Press > to get a priority connection
to an OnStar Emergency Advisor
available 24/7 to:
.
.
Get help for an emergency.
Press > to connect to an OnStar
Emergency Advisor. GPS
Obtain the WiFi network name,
or Service Set Identifier or SSID,
and passphrase (if equipped).
.
Be a Good Samaritan or
respond to an AMBER Alert.
technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
important information to emergency
personnel. OnStar Emergency
Advisors are trained to provide
assistance and link to existing
public emergency service providers
in emergency situations.
.
Get assistance in severe
weather or other crisis and
evacuation routes.
Press Q to connect to a live
Advisor to:
.
Verify account information or
update contact information.
.
Get driving directions. Requires
a specific OnStar
With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially
trained Crisis Advisors are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to
provide a central point of contact,
assistance, and information if a
crisis occurs.
subscription plan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-3
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
with the last direction given, then
responds with “OnStar ready,”
then a tone.
Security
OnStar provides services including
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote
Ignition Block, and Roadside
Assistance, if equipped. OnStar can
unlock the vehicle doors remotely,
if equipped with automatic door
locks, and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.
Using Voice Commands
During a Planned Route
Get My Destination
Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say
“Cancel route.” System
2. Say “Get my destination.”
System responds with the
responds: “Do you want to
cancel directions?”
address and the distance to the
destination, then responds with
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Navigation
OnStar navigation requires a
2. Say “Yes.” System responds:
“OK, request completed, thank
you, goodbye.”
specific OnStar subscription plan.
Other Navigation Services
Available from OnStar
Press Q to receive directions or
have them sent to the vehicle
navigation screen, if equipped.
Destinations can also be forwarded
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
Route Preview
OnStar eNav: Subscribers can
send destinations from
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
MapQuest.com to the vehicle
Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
screen-based navigation system (if
equipped). When ready, the
directions will be downloaded to the
vehicle.
2. Say “Route preview.” System
responds with the next three
maneuvers.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Advisor.
Repeat
2. Request directions.
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
3. Directions are downloaded to the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-4
OnStar
WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped)
pressure (if the vehicle is equipped
with the tire pressure monitoring
system); or activate remote horn
and lights. Also remote start the
vehicle (if factory equipped) or
unlock the doors from anywhere
with a wireless connection (if
equipped with automatic locks).
With a required specific OnStar
subscription plan, a destination can
be sent to the vehicle. For OnStar
RemoteLink information and
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle (if
equipped). After the call ends, press
the “Go” button on the navigation
screen to begin driving directions.
The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot that
provides a high-speed, wireless
Internet connection to connect
multiple mobile devices (data plan
required).
1. To retrieve WiFi hotspot
If directions are downloaded to the
navigation system, the route can
only be canceled through the
navigation system.
information, press = and select
or say “WiFi settings.”
2. The WiFi settings will display the
WiFi network name/SSID,
passphrase, and level of
encryption.
compatibility, see www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
OnStar RemoteLink® Key Fob
Services
Destinations can also be
downloaded on the go. For
information about eNav or
Destination Download, see
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
3. To change the SSID or
passphrase, press Q or call
1-888-4-ONSTAR to connect
with an Advisor.
This feature is included for five
years and allows for remote door
lock/unlock (if equipped with
automatic locks), remote start (if
factory equipped), or activation of
horn and lights from anywhere with
a wireless signal. Download the app
and start using it any time during the
trial period to get started.
Connections
OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App
(If Equipped)
The required specific Onstar
subscription plan includes the
services that follow to help
customers stay connected.
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
mobile app to select Apple®,
Android™, and BlackBerry® or
Windows 7 or 8 mobile devices.
From the mobile device, check the
vehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire
For coverage maps, see
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-5
3. Say “911” without pausing.
System responds: “911.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing. System responds:
“Please say the name tag.”
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
This service allows calls to be made
and received from the vehicle.
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
“OK, dialing 911.”
4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
tag>. Does that sound OK?”
To Make a Call
Retrieve My Number
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
again. System responds: “OK,
storing <name tag>.”
2. Say “Call.” System responds:
“Call. Please say the name or
number to call.”
2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar
Place a Call Using a Stored
Number
Hands-Free Calling number is,”
then says the number.
3. Say the entire number without
pausing, including a “1” and the
area code. System responds:
“OK, calling.”
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
End a Call
Press =. System responds: “Call
ended.”
2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
Calling 911 Emergency
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready,” followed by
a tone.
Store a Name Tag for Speed
Dialing
Verify Minutes and Expiration
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
Press = and say “Minutes” then
“Verify” to check how many minutes
remain and their expiration date.
2. Say “Call.” System responds:
“Call. Please say the name or
number to call.”
2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the number you
would like to store.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-6
OnStar
How OnStar Service Works
Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar Additional
Information
Automatic Crash Response,
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics can
perform a vehicle check every
month. It will check the engine,
transmission, antilock brakes, and
other major vehicle systems. It also
checks the tire pressures, if the
vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
are available on most vehicles. Not
all OnStar services are available
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
more information, a full description
of OnStar services, system
Transferring Service
Press Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor
can assist in canceling or removing
account information.
Selling/Transferring the
Vehicle
needed, press Q, and an Advisor
can run a check.
limitations, and OnStar terms and
conditions:
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediately
to terminate your OnStar services if
the vehicle is disposed of, sold,
transferred, or if the lease ends.
.
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
.
Reactivation for Subsequent
Owners
See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
.
See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
.
Press Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible. The Advisor will update
vehicle records and explain the
OnStar service options available.
Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
.
Press Q to speak with an
Advisor.
OnStar services cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-7
in that area. The wireless service
provider must also have coverage,
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar
services. Service involving location
information about the vehicle cannot
work unless GPS signals are
Services for People with
Disabilities
OnStar Personal Identification
Number (PIN)
Advisors provide services to help
subscribers with physical disabilities
and medical conditions.
A PIN is needed to access some of
the OnStar services, like Remote
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
Assistance. The PIN will need to be
changed the first time when
Press Q for help with:
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
.
speaking with an Advisor. To
change the OnStar PIN, contact an
Locating a gas station with an
attendant to pump gas.
hardware. OnStar services may not
work if the OnStar equipment is not
properly installed or it has not been
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
or modified, OnStar services may
not work. Other problems beyond
the control of OnStar may prevent
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
.
Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
that meets accessibility needs.
.
Warranty
Providing directions to the
closest hospital or pharmacy in
urgent situations.
OnStar equipment may be
warranted as part of the vehicle
warranty.
TTY Users
Languages
OnStar has the ability to
communicate to deaf,
The vehicle can be programmed to
respond in multiple languages.
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY
system can provide in-vehicle
access to all of the OnStar services,
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
Advisors are available in English,
Spanish, and French. Available
languages may vary by country.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-8
OnStar
A temporary loss of GPS can cause
loss of the ability to send a
Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The
Advisor may give a verbal route or
may ask for a call back after the
vehicle is driven into an open area.
to function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
Potential Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Assistance after the vehicle has
been off continuously for five days.
After five days, OnStar can contact
Roadside Assistance and a
locksmith to help gain access to the
vehicle.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated
into the electrical architecture of the
vehicle. Do not add any electrical
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9-69. Added
electrical equipment may interfere
with the operation of the OnStar
system and cause it to not operate.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
Do not place items over or near the
antenna to prevent blocking cellular
and GPS signal reception. Cellular
reception is required for OnStar to
send remote signals to the vehicle.
Global Positioning
System (GPS)
.
Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall
buildings; in parking garages;
around airports; in tunnels,
underpasses; or in an area with
very dense trees. If GPS signals
are not available, the OnStar
system should still operate to
call OnStar. However, OnStar
could have difficulty identifying
the exact location.
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Message
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy
Statement may be found at
www.onstar.com (U.S.),
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We
recommend that you review it.
If you have any questions, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
If there is limited cellular coverage
or the cellular network has reached
maximum capacity, this message
may come on. Press Q to try the
call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.
or press Q to speak with an
Advisor. Users of wireless
communications are cautioned that
the privacy of any information sent
via wireless cellular communications
cannot be assured. Third parties
Vehicle and Power Issues
.
In emergency situations, OnStar
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
can use the last stored GPS
location to send to emergency
responders.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
14-9
may unlawfully intercept or access
transmissions and private
communications without consent.
above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all
copies.
or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
unzip:
OnStar - software
acknowledgements
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of
the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
The definitive version of this
document should be available
at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
license.html indefinitely.
Certain OnStar components include
libcurl and unzip software and other
third party software. Below are the
notices and licenses associated
with libcurl and unzip and for other
third party software please see
http://www.lg.com/global/support/
opensource/index and
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
the following set of individuals:
https://www.onstar.com/web/portal/
getdocuments
libcurl:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel
Stenberg, <[email protected]>.
All rights reserved.
Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or
Permission to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is
otherwise to promote the sale, use
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,
hereby granted, provided that the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-10
OnStar
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,
Rich Wales, Mike White.
this list of conditions in
thereof, including, but not limited
to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are
documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
distribution. The sole exception
to this condition is redistribution
of a standard UnZipSFX binary
(including SFXWiz) as part of a
self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of
this license, as long as the
normal SFX banner has not
been removed from the binary or
disabled.
This software is provided “as is,”
without warranty of any kind,
express or implied. In no event shall
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or
inability to use this software.
further prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.
3. Altered versions–including, but
not limited to, ports to new
Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose,
including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
operating systems, existing ports
with new graphical interfaces,
and dynamic, shared, or static
library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered
versions also must not be
1. Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions.
misrepresented as being
Info-ZIP releases–including, but
not limited to, labeling of the
altered versions with the names
“Info-ZIP” (or any variation
2. Redistributions in binary form
(compiled executables) must
reproduce the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-26
Airbags
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-25
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Armrest
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Assistance Systems for
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Assistance Systems for
Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Automatic
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Automatic Transmission
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Active Emergency
Braking System . . . . . . . . 1-18, 9-52
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-35
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Additional Information
Adding Equipment to the
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Additional Maintenance
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Alarm
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Alert
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-54
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
Air Filter, Passenger
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Cargo
B
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-46
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53, 3-55
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Climate Control Systems
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26
Brake
Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking System
C
Cadillac Premium Care
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Active Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Compartments
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Compressor Kit, Tire
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Cover
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-10
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-16
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Drive Systems
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Connections
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Control
Traction and Electronic
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-25
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-43
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Driving
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Engine Temperature
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Characteristics and
D
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Daytime Running
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Driving (cont'd)
Engine
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-3
Exterior Lighting Battery
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dual Automatic Climate
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Coolant Temperature
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Cooling System Messages . . .5-38
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
E
F
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-21
Electrical Equipment,
Features
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Filter,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Rear Compartment Fuse
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Emergency
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Frequency Statement
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . 3-11
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Filling a Portable Fuel
Fuses (cont'd)
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
H
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Headlamps
Adaptive Forward
G
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Daytime Running
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-26
Requirements, California . . . . .9-60
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Fuses
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-28
Heated
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Heater
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-47
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Lamps (cont'd)
J
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Lane Departure Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . 9-57
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
LATCH System
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-39
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Indicator
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-40
Lamps
Replacing Parts after a
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-4
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Infants and Young Children,
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Level Control
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Light
Adaptive Forward Lighting
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) . . .5-23
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Lighting
Lights (cont'd)
Service Electric Parking
M
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Lights
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Maintenance
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Traction Control System
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Maintenance and Care
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-4
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Messages
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Locks
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-21
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-21
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-25
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-23
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-38
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Messages (cont'd)
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
OnStar® Vehicle
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Operating Mode
Overheated Engine
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Ordering
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-10
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Overheated Engine
Protection
N
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Object Detection System . . . . .5-41
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Mirrors
Navigation
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
O
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
OnStar®
Automatic Dimming
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-22
Monitor System, Tire
P
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Parking
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
OnStar® Additional
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Parking or Backing
Program
Records
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Passenger Airbag Status
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Recreational Vehicle
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-31
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Premium Care Maintenance
Cadillac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Privacy
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-37
Replacing LATCH System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-24
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Retained Accessory
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear Axle
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-6
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . . . 2-25
Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Recommended Fluids and
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Ride Control Systems
Safety Defects Reporting
Security
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-31
Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Seats
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Service Electric Parking
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated and Ventilated
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-6
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Securing Child
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-24
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-22
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53, 3-55
Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Services
Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Special Application Services . . . 11-9
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
StabiliTrak
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Starting the Vehicle
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Management System . . . 4-4
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Sunshade
System
Active Emergency Braking . . . .9-52
Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15
Systems
Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-19
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-7
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-48
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Tires (cont'd)
Towing (cont'd)
U
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-47
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-78
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Traction
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-55
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-31
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Trailer
V
Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Turn and Lane-Change
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-23
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-64
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-13
Vehicle Care
Wheels
Storing the Tire Sealant
Alignment and Tire
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Vehicle Data Recording
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-44
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
W
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-56
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-14
INDEX
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|